Yamaha RX-A1040 El manual del propietario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: RX-A1040

Categoría: Receptores AV

Tipo: El manual del propietario

English

AV Receiver

Owner’s Manual

Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit.

En 2

CONTENTS

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

FEATURES 6

What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

PREPARATIONS 14

General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

1 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Basic speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Advanced speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

2 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

3 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

5 Connecting a network cable or the wireless antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Connecting the network cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Connecting the wireless antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

6 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Connecting recording devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Connecting a device with analog multi-channel output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

7 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

8 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . . 38

Measuring at one listening position (single measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Checking the measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Selecting the connection method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Connecting the unit to a wireless network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

PLAYBACK 54

Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Selecting an HDMI output jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch

(SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Selecting setting items to be included as scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Setting the frequency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

HD Radio™ tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Operating the radio on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

En 3

Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Playback of Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Playing back music with AirPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Multi-zone configuration examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Preparing Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Controlling Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Viewing the status information on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Configuring playback settings for different playback sources

(Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

CONFIGURATIONS 100

Configuring input sources (Input menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Input menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100

Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Scene menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102

Configuring sound programs/surround decoders

(Sound Program menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Sound Program menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105

Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109

Speaker (Manual Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114

Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116

HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

Multi Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121

Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125

Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126

Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) . . . . . . . . . 126

Types of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127

Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . 128

ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129

Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129

Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129

Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129

Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

Updating the unit’s firmware via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

En 4

APPENDIX 133

Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Power, system and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Network information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Supported devices and file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145

Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Multi-zone output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147

HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Audio Return Channel (ARC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Reference diagram (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Accessories En 5

Accessories

Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.

 Remote control  Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2)

 AM antenna  FM antenna

*One of the above is supplied depending on the region

of purchase.

 YPAO microphone  Wireless antenna

 Power cable

*The supplied power cable varies depending on the region

of purchase.



CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual)

 Easy Setup Guide

 Safety Brochure

Insert the batteries the right

way round.

Operating range of the remote control

• Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range

shown below.

• The illustrations of the main unit and remote control used in this manual are of the U.S.A. model,

unless otherwise specified.

• (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only)

For information on how to control external devices with the remote control, refer to “Supplement for

Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM.

• Some features are not available in certain regions.

• Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice.

• This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.

• This manual describes all the “iPod”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to “iPod”, “iPhone”

and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified.

• indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.

• indicates supplementary explanations for better use.

30° 30°

Within

6 m (20 ft)

FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 6

FEATURES

What you can do with the unit

Speakers

BD/DVD player

HDMI Control

Audio/Video

TV remote control

Audio

HDMI Control

Audio

Audio/Video

Sequential operation of a TV,

AV receiver, and BD/DVD

player (HDMI Control)

. p.147

Supports 2- to 7-channel (plus front presence) speaker

system and up to 2 subwoofer connections. Allows

you to enjoy favorite acoustic spaces in various styles.

• Automatically optimizing the speaker

settings to suit your room (YPAO)

. p.38

• Reproducing stereo or multichannel

sounds with the sound fields like

actual movie theaters and concert halls

(CINEMA DSP)

. p.58

• Enjoying compressed music with

enhanced sound (Compressed Music

Enhancer)

. p.62

• Bi-amp connections, channel

expansion (with external power-amp)

and multi-zone configurations to

enhance your system

. p.20

iPod/iPhone/iPad

USB device

Audio

Network contents

Wide variety of supported content

• iPod/iPhone/iPad

. p.70

•USB

. p.73

• Media server (PC/NAS)

. p.76

• Internet radio

. p.80

•AirPlay

. p.83

3D and 4K Ultra HD signals supported

AV receiver (the unit)

Change the input source and favorite

settings with one touch (SCENE)

. p.55

Control

Audio/Video

(via HDMI/MHL)

Smartphone/Tablet

Control

FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 7

Full of useful functions!

❑ Connecting various devices (p.28)

A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks

on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as

BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players),

game consoles, camcorders, and other devices.

❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound

with a single HDMI cable connection

(Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.26)

When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one

HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio

input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control

signals.

❑ Various wireless connection methods

(p.46)

The unit supports the Wi-Fi feature that allows the unit to

connect to your wireless router (access point) without a

network cable connection. In addition, Wireless Direct

enables connecting a mobile device to the unit directly

without router.

❑ Creating 3-dimensional sound fields (p.58)

Connecting front presence speakers allows you to

create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in your own

room (CINEMA DSP 3D). Even when no front presence

speakers are connected, the Virtual Presence Speaker

(VPS) function produces 3D surround sound.

❑ Surround playback with 5 speakers placed

in front (p.60)

If you have surround speakers but there is no space to

place them in the rear of your room, you can place them in

the front and enjoy multi-channel surround sound with the

5 speakers placed in the front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT).

❑ Low power consumption (p.126)

The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the

unit’s power consumption.

❑ Easy operation and wireless music

playback from iPhone or Android™ device

By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV

CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an

iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices. Visit the

Yamaha website for details.

HDMI Control

TV audio

Video from

external device

Wi-Fi or

Wireless Direct

Useful tips

I want to connect a playback device using HDMI for

video and non-HDMI for audio...

Use “Audio Select” in the “Option” menu to specify the

type of an audio input jack to be used for the

corresponding input source (p.99).

Video and audio are not synchronized...

Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay

between video and audio output (p.114).

I want to hear audio from the TV speakers...

Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the

output destination of signals input into the unit (p.118).

Your TV speakers may be selected as an output

destination.

I want to get more bass sounds…

Set “Extra Bass” in the “Option” menu to “On” to enjoy

enhanced bass sounds (p.98).

I want to change the on-screen menu language...

Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a

language from English, Japanese, French, German,

Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.37).

I want to update the firmware...

Use “FIRM UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu

to update the unit’s firmware (p.131). If the unit is

connected to the Internet, a message will be displayed

on the TV when a firmware update is available (p.132).

Many other settings are available that let you to

customize the unit. For details, see the following pages.

• Input settings (p.100)

• SCENE settings (p.102)

• Sound program and surround decoder settings

(p.105)

• Various function settings (p.109)

• Information view (such as audio signal and video

signal) (p.127)

• System settings (p.129)

FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 8

Front panel

1 MAIN ZONE z key

Turns on/off (standby) the unit.

2 Standby indicator

Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the

following conditions.

• HDMI Control is enabled (p.117)

• Standby Through is enabled (p.118)

• Network Standby is enabled (p.119)

• An iPod is being charged (p.70)

3 Front display

Displays information (p.10).

4 Remote control sensor

Receives remote control signals (p.5).

5 PURE DIRECT key

Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.62).

6 INPUT knob

Selects an input source.

7 Front panel door

For protecting controls and jacks (p.9).

8 VOLUME knob

Adjusts the volume.

Part names and functions

INPUT

MAIN ZONE

VOLUME

PURE DIRECT

52 3 41

Opening the front panel door

• To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently

press the bottom of the door to open it. Keep the door closed

when not using controls or jacks behind the front panel door.

(Be careful not to trap your fingers.)

FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 9

■ Inside of the front panel door

9 ON SCREEN key

Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.

0 Menu operations keys

Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.

ENTER Confirms a selected item.

RETURN Returns to the previous screen.

A OPTION key

Displays the option menu (p.96).

B DISPLAY key

Displays status information on the TV (p.95).

C TONE/BALANCE key

Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range

of output sounds (p.97).

Adjusts the left/right channel volume balance for Zone2

(p.91).

D STRAIGHT key

Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.61).

E PROGRAM keys

Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.57).

F SCENE keys

Select the registered input source, sound program, and

various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when

it is in standby mode (p.55).

G MULTI ZONE keys

ZONE 2 Enables/disables the audio output to

Zone2 (p.90).

ZONE CONTROL Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2)

that is controlled by the keys and knobs

on the front panel (p.90).

H INFO (WPS) key

Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.95).

Enters the wireless network connection setup (WPS push

button configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.48).

I MEMORY key

Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.64).

J FM and AM keys

Switch between FM and AM (p.63).

K PRESET keys

Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.64).

L TUNING keys

Select the radio frequency (p.63).

M USB jack

For connecting a USB storage device (p.73) or an iPod

(p.70).

N YPAO MIC jack

For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.38).

O PHONES jack

For connecting headphones.

P VIDEO AUX jacks

For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game

console (p.31, 32) or a smartphone (p.31).

OPTION

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY

RETURN

MULTI ZONE

VIDEO AUX

ZONE 2

ZONE CONTROL

YPAO MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

VIDEO

TONE/BALANCE

STRAIGHT

PROGRAM

SCENE

1234

HDMI/

MHL

RLAUDIO

INFO(WPS)

MEMORY

FM AM

TUNING

PRESET

ENTER

5V 2.1A

5V 1A

9 A C D H I KE J LB0

M N O

FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 10

Front display (indicators)

1 HDMI

Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.

Lights up when HDMI signals are being input.

OUT1/OUT2

Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI

signal.

2 ECO

Lights up when the unit is in the eco mode (p.126).

3 Signal strength indicator

Indicates the strength of the wireless network signal (p.46).

4 ZONE2

Lights up when Zone2 is enabled (p.90).

5 SLEEP

Lights up when the sleep timer is on.

6 Information display

Displays the current status (such as input name and sound

mode name). You can switch the information by pressing

INFO (p.95).

7 MUTE

Blinks when audio is muted.

8 Volume indicator

Indicates the current volume.

9 VIRTUAL

Lights up when the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.58) or

the virtual surround processing (p.60) is working.

0 ENHANCER

Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.62) is

working.

A STEREO

Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.

TUNED

Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station

signal.

(U.S.A. model only)

Lights up when the unit is receiving an HD Radio station

signal.

B CINEMA DSP

Lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.58) is working. “CINEMA

DSP n” lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D (p.58) is activated.

C PA RT Y

Lights up when the unit is in the party mode. (p.91)

D Cursor indicators

Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.

E ADAPTIVE DRC

Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.97) is working.

F Speaker indicators

Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.

A Front speaker (L)

S Front speaker (R)

D Center speaker

F Surround speaker (L)

G Surround speaker (R)

H Surround back speaker (L)

J Surround back speaker (R)

K Surround back speaker

B Front presence speaker (L)

N Front presence speaker (R)

L Subwoofer

OUT

213

VOLUME

MUTE

ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL

ZONE

ECO

SBL SBRSB

FPL

CL R

FPR

ENHANCER

PARTY

STEREO TUNED

SLEEP

ZONE

987

0 DFDC

5423

FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 11

Rear panel

1 PHONO jacks

For connecting to a turntable (p.30).

2 DC OUT jack

For connecting to an optional accessory.

3 AV 1–4 jacks

For connecting to video/audio playback devices and

inputting video/audio signals (p.28).

4 HDMI OUT 1 jack

For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting

video/audio signals (p.26). When using ARC, TV audio signal

can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack.

HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack

For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting

video/audio signals (p.28), or for connecting to an

HDMI-compatible device used in Zone2 (p.88).

5 AV OUT jacks

For outputting video/audio to a recording device (such as a

VCR) (p.35).

6 MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

component/composite video jacks

For connecting to a TV that supports component or

composite video and outputting video signals (p.27) or for

connecting to a Zone2 video monitor (p.87).

7 COMPONENT VIDEO (AV 1–3) jacks

For connecting to video playback devices that support

component video and inputting video signals (p.29).

8 HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks

For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and

inputting video/audio signals (p.28).

9 TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks

For connecting to devices that support the trigger function

(p.36).

0 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that

allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another

room (p.89).

A NETWORK jack

For connecting to a network with a network cable (p.34).

B RS-232C terminal

This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation.

Consult your dealer for details.

C WIRELESS jack

For connecting the supplied wireless antenna (p.34).

D VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(General model only)

Selects the switch position according to your local voltage

(p.36).

E AC IN jack

For connecting the supplied power cable (p.36).

DC OUT

0.5A

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

IN OUT

REMOTE

AV O UT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

AC IN

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

OPTICAL

AUDIO 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT

AUDIO 3AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACKSURROUND

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/

COAXIAL

L R R RL L L

SINGLE

(4 RADIO)

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

EXTRA SP

RS-232C

TRIGGER

OUT

12V 0.1A

MAX. TOTAL

NETWORK

( 3

NET

)

B PR

PRPB YPRPB

YPRPB

AV 1

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 3

AV 2

WIRELESS

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

21 4 A5 6 E9 : B783

* The area around the video/audio output jacks is

marked in white on the actual product to

prevent improper connections.

(U.S.A. model)

FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 12

F ANTENNA jacks

For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.33).

G AUDIO 1–4 jacks

For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting

audio signals (p.30).

H MULTI CH INPUT jacks

For connecting to a device that supports multi-channel

output and inputting audio signals (p.35).

I ZONE OUT jacks

For connecting to the external amplifier used in Zone2 and

for outputting audio (p.87).

J SPEAKERS terminals

For connecting to speakers (p.15).

K PRE OUT jacks

For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.18) or

to an external power amplifier (p.24).

DC OUT

0.5A

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

IN OUT

REMOTE

AV O UT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

AC IN

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

OPTICAL

AUDIO 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT

AUDIO 3AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACKSURROUND

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/

COAXIAL

L R R RL L L

SINGLE

(4 RADIO)

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

EXTRA SP

RS-232C

TRIGGER

OUT

12V 0.1A

MAX. TOTAL

NETWORK

( 3

NET

)

B PR

PRPB YPRPB

YPRPB

AV 1

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 3

AV 2

WIRELESS

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

JGF I KH

* The area around the video/audio output jacks is

marked in white on the actual product to

prevent improper connections.

(U.S.A. model)

FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 13

Remote control

1 Remote control signal transmitter

Transmits infrared signals.

2 z (receiver power) key

Turns on/off (standby) the unit.

3 Input selection keys

Select an input source for playback.

AV 1–7 AV 1–7 jacks

V-AUX VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)

AUDIO 1–4 AUDIO 1–4 jacks

PHONO PHONO jacks

MULTI MULTI CH INPUT jacks

USB USB jack (on the front panel)

NET NETWORK sources (press repeatedly to select

a desired network source)

TUNER FM/AM radio

4 MAIN/ZONE2 switch

Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2) that is controlled by

the remote control (p.90).

5 SCENE keys

Select the registered input source, sound program, and

various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when

it is in standby mode (p.55).

6 PROGRAM keys

Select a sound program (p.57).

7 External device operation keys

Displays menus for the HDMI Control-compatible playback

device (p.147).

8 ON SCREEN key

Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.

9 Menu operation keys

Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.

ENTER Confirms a selected item.

RETURN Returns to the previous screen.

0 MODE key

Switches the iPod operation modes (p.72).

(U.S.A. model only) Selects an HD Radio audio program

(p.65).

A Radio keys

Operate the FM/AM radio when “TUNER” is selected as the

input source (p.63).

BAND Switches between FM and AM radio.

PRESET Select a preset station.

TUNING Select the radio frequency.

External device operation keys

Let you perform playback operations when “USB” or “NET” is

selected as the input source, or control playback of the

HDMI Control-compatible playback device (p.147).

B Sound mode keys

Select a sound mode (p.57).

C INFO key

Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.95).

D SLEEP key

Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a

specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press

repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off).

E Numeric keys

Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies.

MEMORY key

Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets (p.64).

F HDMI OUT key

Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output

(p.54).

G PA RT Y k e y

Turns on/off the party mode (p.91).

H VOLUME keys

Adjust the volume.

I MUTE key

Mutes the audio output.

J OPTION key

Displays the option menu (p.96).

K DISPLAY key

Displays status information on the TV (p.95).

• (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only)

For information on the keys other than those above, refer to

“Supplement for Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

(U.S.A. model)

PREPARATIONS ➤ General setup procedure En 14

PREPARATIONS

This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!

General setup procedure

1 Connecting speakers (p.15)

Basic speaker configuration (p.16)

Select the speaker layout and connect the speakers to the unit.

Advanced speaker configuration (p.20)

Apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone

configurations to enhance the system.

2 Connecting a TV (p.26)

Connect a TV to the unit.

3 Connecting playback devices (p.28)

Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit.

4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.33)

Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.

Connecting a network cable or the

wireless antenna (p.34)

Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or connect the supplied wireless antenna

for establishing a wireless network connection.

6 Connecting other devices (p.35)

Connect external devices such as recording devices.

7 Connecting the power cable (p.36)

After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.

Selecting an on-screen menu language (

p.37

)

Select the desired on-screen menu language (default: English).

Optimizing the speaker settings

automatically (YPAO) (p.38)

Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room

(YPAO).

Connecting to a network device wirelessly

(p.46)

Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a wireless connection.

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 15

The unit has 7 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 9 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers to create the favorite acoustic space in your room.

You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system (p.20).

Functions of each speaker

• We recommend using front presence speakers to have a full effect of the 3-dimensional sound fields.

However, the unit creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to

produce 3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected (p.58).

• Use “Ideal speaker layout” (diagram on the right) as reference. You do not need to exactly adjust the

speaker layout to this diagram since the YPAO function of the unit will automatically optimize the speaker

settings (such as distances) to suit the speaker layout.

• When using only one surround back speaker, place it straight behind the listening position (middle of “SBL”

and “SBR” in the diagram).

Ideal speaker layout

1 Connecting speakers

Caution

• Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6  MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.18).

Speaker type Abbr. Function

Front (L) 1

Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds).

Front (R) 2

Center 3 Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogues and vocals).

Surround (L) 4 Produce surround left/right channel sounds. Surround speakers also

produce surround back channel sounds when no surround back

speakers are connected.

Surround (R) 5

Surround

back (L)

Produce surround back left/right channel sounds.

Surround

back (R)

Front

presence (L)

Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds. In combination with CINEMA DSP

3D (p.58), the front presence speakers create a natural 3-dimensional

sound field in your room.

Front

presence (R)

Subwoofer 9

Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces

bass parts of other channels.

This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers to the

unit and place them on the left/right (or front/rear) sides of the room.

0.3 m (1 ft) or more

1.8 m

(5.9 ft)

0.5 to 1 m

(1.6 to 3.3 ft)

1.8 m

(5.9 ft)

0.5 to 1 m

(1.6 to 3.3 ft)

10°~30°10°~30°

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 16

Basic speaker configuration

■ Placing speakers in your room

Depending on the number of speakers, place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This section describes the representative speaker layout examples.

❑ 7.1+2-channel system

(using both surround back and front presence speakers)

This speaker system brings out the full performance of the unit and allows you to enjoy

a highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field with any contents.

• The surround back speakers and front presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. The unit

automatically changes the speakers to be used, depending on the selected CINEMA DSP (p.58).

❑ 7.1-channel system

(using front presence speakers)

This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a highly-natural

3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying 5.1-channel contents.

❑ 7.1-channel system (using surround back speakers)

This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and

surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to

enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 17

❑ 5.1-channel system

This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and

surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying

5.1-channel contents.

❑ Front 5.1-channel system (using surround speakers)

Even when surround speakers are placed in the front side, the unit creates the virtual

surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound (Virtual

CINEMA FRONT) when “Layout (Surround)” (

p.113

) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”.

• You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (front 4.1-channel system).

❑ Front 5.1-channel system (using front presence speakers)

This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural

3-dimensional sound field, and creates the virtual surround speakers using the front

speakers to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP).

❑ 2.1-channel system

Even when no surround speakers are connected, the unit creates the virtual surround

speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound

(Virtual CINEMA DSP).

• Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1-channel system.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 18

■ Setting the speaker impedance

Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When using a

6-ohm speaker for any channel, set the speaker impedance to “6  MIN”. In this case,

you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall

outlet.

While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press

MAIN ZONE z.

Check that “SPEAKER IMP.” is displayed on the front display.

Press STRAIGHT to select “6  MIN”.

Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and remove the

power cable from the AC wall outlet.

You are now ready to connect the speakers.

■ Connecting speakers

Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit.

Speakers to be connected

If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers (*1) or front

presence speakers (*2).

If you have five speakers, use two of them as surround speakers (*3) or front presence

speakers (*4).

• You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit.

• To use an external power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier, etc.) to enhance speaker output, see “Connecting an

external power amplifier” (p.24).

MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

8MIN

SPEAKERIMP.

Caution

• Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before connecting the

speakers.

• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the

unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit,

“Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.

Room Speaker type Abbr.

Speaker system

(the number of channels)

Power Amp

Assign

(p.111)

7+2 7 5 2

Main zone

Front (L) 1 ●●●●

Basic (default)

Front (R) 2 ●●●●

Center 3 ●●●

Surround (L) 4 ●●*3

Surround (R) 5 ●●*3

Surround

back (L)

6 ● *1

Surround

back (R)

7 ● *1

Front

presence (L)

E ● *2 *4

Front

presence (R)

R ● *2 *4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 19

Cables necessary for connection (commercially available)

Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)

Audio pin cable (two for connecting two subwoofers)

Connection diagram

Refer to the following diagram and connect the speakers to the unit.

• When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side).

❑ Connecting speaker cables

Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the

unit and the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are

colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire

to the positive terminal.

a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable, and

twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together.

b Loosen the speaker terminal.

c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the

terminal.

d Tighten the terminal.

Using a banana plug

(U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia and General models only)

a Tighten the speaker terminal.

b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.

❑ Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier)

Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.

–

The unit (rear)

FRONT

+ (red)

– (black)

FRONT

Banana plug

(

SINGLE

)

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT

CENTER

SUR. BACKSURRUND

FRONT

Audio pin cable

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 20

Advanced speaker configuration

In addition to the basic speaker configuration (p.16), the unit also allows you to apply the following speaker configurations to enhance your system.

Using the four internal

amplifiers for front speakers to

have more high-quality sounds

(Example) (Example) (Example)

Bi-amp

connection

Combining with an external

power amplifier (Hi-Fi

amplifier, etc.) to build an

extended system

Using the excess internal

amplifiers for stereo speakers

in another room

External power

amplifier

Main zone

Zone2

Bi-amp connection Power-amp channel expansion Multi-zone configuration

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 21

■ Available speaker configurations

• When applying one of these configurations, you need to configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.111)

in the “Setup” menu.

❑ 5ch BI-AMP

Main zone

Multi-zone

Power Amp Assign

(p.111)

Page

Output

channel

(max)

Bi-amp

External

power

amplifier

(required)

5  5ch BI-AMP 21

7 

Surround

back

5ch BI-AMP +SB 22

7 +1 (Zone2) 7ch +1ZONE 22

Bi-amp

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT and EXTRA SP (bi-amp connection)

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 (not used)

ER (not used)

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 22

❑ 5ch BI-AMP +SB ❑ 7ch +1ZONE

Bi-amp

via external amp

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT and EXTRA SP (bi-amp connection)

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SUR.BACK (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

ER (not used)

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

Main zone

Zone2

• When Zone2 output is enabled (p.90), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SURROUND BACK

ER (not used)

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

Zone2 speakers EXTRA SP

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 23

■

Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections

When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the

FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP terminals.

To enable the bi-amp function, configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.111) in the

“Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet.

• The FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP terminals output the same signals.

■ Connecting Zone2 speakers

When using Zone2 speakers, connect them to the EXTRA SP terminals.

To utilize the EXTRA SP terminals for Zone2 speakers, configure the “Power Amp

Assign” setting (p.111) in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC

wall outlet.

• You can also connect Zone2 speakers using an external amplifier (p.87).

Caution

• Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a

tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp

connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker

cables.

The unit (rear)

Main zone

Zone2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 24

■ Connecting an external power amplifier

When connecting an external power amplifier to enhance speaker output, connect the

input jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit. The same channel

signals are output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their corresponding SPEAKERS

terminals.

1 FRONT jacks

Output front channel sounds.

2 SURROUND jacks

Output surround channel sounds.

3 SUR. BACK jacks

Output surround back channel sounds. When using only one surround back speaker, connect

the external amplifier to the SINGLE jack (L side).

4 CENTER jack

Outputs center channel sounds.

(Example)

Connecting front speakers via an external power amplifier

About external power amplifiers

We recommend using power amplifiers that meet the following conditions.

• With unbalanced inputs

• With volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit)

• Output power: 100 W or more (6 to 8 )

Caution

• To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure the followings before making

connections.

– Remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the external power amplifier before connecting them.

– When using the PRE OUT jacks, do not connect speakers to the corresponding SPEAKERS

terminals.

– When using a pre-main amplifier that does not have the volume control bypass, turn up the volume of

the pre-main amplifier enough and fix it. In this case, do not connect other devices (except the unit) to

the pre-main amplifier.

1 2 34

The unit (rear)

MAIN IN

FRONT

The unit (rear)

PRE OUT (FRONT) jacks

Main input jack

Amplifier with

volume control

bypass

(such as A-S3000)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PREPARATIONS ➤ Input/output jacks and cables En 25

■ Video/audio jacks

❑ HDMI jacks

Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single

jack. Use an HDMI cable.

• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using

a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality

degradation.

• The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return

Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K Ultra HD video transmission

features.

• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K Ultra HD videos.

❑ HDMI/MHL jack

Transmits digital video and digital sound. Use an MHL

or HDMI cable.

• The VIDEO AUX jack on the front panel of the unit supports both

MHL and HDMI connections. Use a cable that matches the jack on

your MHL-compatible mobile device. For details on an MHL

connection, see “MHL connection” (p.31). When connecting an

HDMI-compatible playback device to the VIDEO AUX jack, use an

HDMI cable.

■ Video jacks

❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

Transmit video signals separated into three

components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (P

B),

and chrominance red (P

R). Use a component video

cable with three plugs.

❑ VIDEO jacks

Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.

■ Audio jacks

❑ OPTICAL jacks

Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical

cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before

using the cable.

❑ COAXIAL jacks

Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial

cable.

❑ AUDIO jacks

Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin

cable (RCA cable).

Input/output jacks and cables

AV 1

HDMI cable

MHL or HDMI cable

COMPONEN

AV 1

Component video cable

AV 1

Video pin cable

Digital optical cable

Digital coaxial cable

Stereo pin cable

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 26

Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV.

You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.

To maximize the performance of the unit, we recommend connecting a TV with an HDMI

cable.

■ HDMI connection

Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or

stereo pin cable).

• You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.28).

• You do not make an audio cable connection between the TV and the unit in the following cases:

– If your TV supports Audio Return Channel (ARC)

– If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box

• If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s

power and volume with the TV’s remote control.

To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit. For

details on the settings, see “Information on HDMI” (p.147).

■ Component/composite video connection

When connecting any video device with a component video cable, connect the TV to

the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks.

When connecting any video device with a video pin cable, connect the TV to the

MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack.

• If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be

output to the TV.

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.

• If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box, you do not need to make an audio cable

connection between the TV and the unit.

2 Connecting a TV

HDMI

OPTICAL

AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

AUDIO

OPTICAL

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

The unit (rear)

HDMI OUT jack

AUDIO 1

(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks

Audio output

(digital optical or analog stereo)

HDMI input

About Audio Return Channel (ARC)

• ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to the unit with a

single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.

• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 27

❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable) ❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable)

OPTICAL

AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

AUDIO

OPTICAL

YPB PR

COMPONENT VIDEO

PB PR

MONITOR

OUT

The unit

(rear)

MONITOR OUT

(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks

Video input

(component video)

AUDIO 1

(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks

Audio output

(digital optical or analog stereo)

OPTICAL

AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

AUDIO

OPTICAL

VIDEO

ZONE OUT

MONITOR

OUT

The unit (rear)

MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack

Video input (composite video)

AUDIO 1

(OPTICAL or AUDIO)

jacks

Audio output

(digital optical or analog stereo)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 28

■ Connecting another TV or a projector

The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit

with an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching

videos with the remote control (p.54).

• HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack.

• If you set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2”, you can connect a video monitor for

Zone2 to the HDMI OUT 2 jack and enjoy videos and audio using the video monitor (p.88).

The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow

you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect

an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages.

• Connecting an iPod (p.70)

• Connecting a USB storage device (p.73)

Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)

Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game

consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video

device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI

connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack.

• Videos input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to a TV connected to the unit with a cable other than

HDMI. For details, refer to “Video signal flow” (p.146).

• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”

setting (p.123) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (A , B , C ),

COAXIAL (a, b, f) and OPTICAL (c, d, e) jacks to another input source.

• If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit

will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.99) in the “Option” menu.

■ HDMI connection

Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–7 on the remote control, the video/audio

played back on the video device will be output from the unit.

HDMI

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

The unit

(rear)

HDMI OUT 2 jack

HDMI input

Projector

TV (already connected)

3 Connecting playback devices

HDMI

The unit (rear)

HDMI output

Video device

HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 29

■ Component video connection

Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable

(digital coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the

unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–3 on the remote control, the video/audio

played back on the video device will be output from the unit.

■ Composite video connection

Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital

coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit)

depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio

played back on the video device will be output from the unit.

Output jacks on video device

Input jacks on the unit

Video Audio

Component video

Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)

Digital optical AV 3 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL)

Analog stereo AV 1–3 (COMPONENT VIDEO + AUDIO)

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

The unit (rear)

AV 1–3

(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks

Video output

(component video)

Video device

Audio output

(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,

analog stereo)

Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),

AV 3 (OPTICAL),

AV 1–3 (AUDIO) jacks

Output jacks on video device

Input jacks on the unit

Video Audio

Composite video

Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)

Digital optical AV 3–4 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)

Analog stereo AV 1–4 (VIDEO + AUDIO)

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

VIDEO

The unit (rear)

AV 1–4 (VIDEO) jacks

Video output

(composite video)

Video device

Audio output

(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,

analog stereo)

Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),

AV 3–4 (OPTICAL),

AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 30

Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)

Connect audio devices such as CD players, MD players, and a turntable to the unit.

Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the

following connections.

• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”

setting (p.123) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COAXIAL (a, b, f) and OPTICAL

(c, d, e) jacks to another input source.

• If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit

will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.99) in the “Option” menu.

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4 or PHONO on the remote

control, the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit.

Audio output jacks on audio device Audio output jacks on the unit

Digital coaxial

AV 1–2 (COAXIAL)

AUDIO 2 (COAXIAL)

Digital optical

AV 3–4 (OPTICAL)

AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL)

Analog stereo

AV 1–4 (AUDIO)

AUDIO 1–4 (AUDIO)

Turntable (PHONO) PHONO

When connecting a turntable

• The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a

low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer.

• Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal.

PHONO

GND

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

PHONO

GND

Audio output

(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,

analog stereo)

Any of AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4

(COAXIAL, OPTICAL, AUDIO) jacks

The unit

(rear)

Audio device

PHONO jacks

Audio output

(PHONO)

Turntable

Ground lead

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 31

Connecting to the jacks on the front panel

Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect a playback device to the unit.

Use the USB jack to connect an iPod or a USB storage device. For details, see

“Connecting an iPod” (p.70) or “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.73).

Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on the unit.

❑ HDMI connection

Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the

unit with an HDMI cable.

If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX on the remote control, the

video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit.

• To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI

OUT jack of the unit (p.26).

• You need to prepare an HDMI cable that matches the output jacks on your device.

• When “USB” is selected as the input source, video signals input to the VIDEO AUX jacks are output from

the HDMI OUT and MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jacks by default. You can change the video out setting in

“Video Out” (p.99) in the “Option” menu.

❑ MHL connection

Connect an MHL-compatible mobile device (such as smartphones) to the unit with an

MHL cable. You can enjoy full HD videos and multichannel audio sources stored on the

mobile device. The VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack of the unit enables you to input

videos and audio directly from the mobile device to the unit.

If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played

back on the mobile device will be output from the unit.

• To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI

OUT jack of the unit (p.26).

• You need to prepare an MHL cable that matches the jack on your mobile device.

• If you cannot hear sounds played on the mobile device, check the volume of the mobile device.

• You can operate the mobile device using the menu operation keys, external device operation keys and

numeric keys on the remote control. However, some features may not be compatible, depending on the

mobile device or its application. In this case, operate the mobile device itself.

• If “Standby Through” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, you can output mobile device videos/audio

to the TV or operate the mobile device using the remote control of the unit even when the unit is in standby

mode.

• The unit supplies power to the mobile device in the following conditions.

– The unit is turned on.

– The unit is in standby mode while “Standby Through” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”.

DISPLAY

RETURN

MULTI ZONE

VIDEO AUX

ZONE 2

ZONE CONTROL

YPAO MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

VIDEO

PROGRAM

HDMI/

MHL

RLAUDIO

FM AM

TUNING

ENTER

5V 2.1A

5V 1A

HDMI

Game console

Camcorder

The unit (front)

DISPLAY

RETURN

MULTI ZONE

VIDEO AUX

ZONE 2

ZONE CONTROL

YPAO MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

VIDEO

PROGRAM

HDMI/

MHL

RLAUDIO

FM AM

TUNING

ENTER

5V 2.1A

5V 1A

MHL

Mobile device

MHL output

The unit (front)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 32

❑ Composite video/analog stereo connection

Connect a playback device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with a

video pin cable and a stereo pin cable.

If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played

back on the device will be output from the unit.

• If you connect video devices to both the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack and VIDEO AUX

(VIDEO/AUDIO) jacks, the unit outputs video/audio input through the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack.

DISPLAY

RETURN

MULTI ZONE

VIDEO AUX

ZONE 2

ZONE CONTROL

YPAO MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

VIDEO

PROGRAM

HDMI/

MHL

RLAUDIO

FM AM

TUNING

ENTER

5V 2.1A

5V 1A

V RL

Game console

Camcorder

The unit (front)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the FM/AM antennas En 33

Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.

Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.

Assembling the AM antenna

Connecting the AM antenna

• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.

• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.

4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas

• The location of the antenna jacks varies depending on the region of purchase.

FM antenna

AM antenna

The unit (rear)

Hold down Insert Release

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a network cable or the wireless antenna En 34

Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or connect the

supplied wireless antenna for establishing a wireless network connection.

You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and

Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.

Connecting the network cable

Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5

or higher straight cable).

• If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit,

as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to

configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network

parameters manually (p.119).

• You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in

“Network” (p.127) in the “Information” menu.

• Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router)

may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the

security software or firewall settings appropriately.

• Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.

• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.

Connecting the wireless antenna

Connect the supplied wireless antenna to the unit for establishing a wireless network

connection.

For information on how to connect the unit to a network device wirelessly, see

“Connecting to a network device wirelessly” (p.46).

a Rotate the antenna clockwise.

b Stand the antenna up straight.

• Do not connect the antenna other than the supplied one.

• Do not apply excessive force on the antenna. Doing so may damage it.

• When packing the unit, remove the antenna to prevent damage.

5 Connecting a network cable or the wireless antenna

LAN

WAN

Network Attached Storage

(NAS)

Internet

Modem

Router

Network cable

The unit (rear)

Mobile device

(such as iPod touch

and iPhone)

WIRELESS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting other devices En 35

Connecting recording devices

You can connect video/audio recording devices to the AV OUT jacks. These jacks

output video/audio signals selected as the input.

• The AV OUT jacks cannot output video/audio signals input through the HDMI or COMPONENT VIDEO

jacks.

• Be sure to use the AV OUT jacks only for connecting recording devices.

Connecting a device with analog multi-channel output

You can connect an analog multi-channel output device such as a DVD player and an

SACD player to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.

If you select “MULTI CH” as the input source by pressing MULTI on the remote control,

the audio played back on the device will be output from the unit.

• You can select a video source to be displayed when “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source using

“Video Out” (p.99) in the “Option” menu. When connecting a video device (such as a DVD player) to the

MULTI CH INPUT jacks, use the input jack specified in “Video Out” for the video connection.

• Since the unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing

speakers, make appropriate settings on the external device (such as a DVD player) that suit to the speaker

configuration.

• When “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source, sound mode selection and tone control adjustment are

not available.

6 Connecting other devices

VIDEO

AUDIO

OPTICAL

AV OUT

The unit (rear)

AV OUT jacks

Video/audio input

Video/audio

recording device

MULTI CH INPUT

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

The unit (rear)

MULTI CH

INPUT jacks

Channel output

(Center)

Device with analog

multi-channel output

(Subwoofer)

(Surround

back)

(Surround)

(Front)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the power cable En 36

Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function

The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the

unit (such as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that

supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the

trigger function by connecting the external device to one of the TRIGGER OUT jacks.

• You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output1” and “Trigger Output2” (p.124) in the

“Setup” menu.

After all the connections are complete, connect the supplied power cable to the unit

and then to an AC wall outlet.

TRIGGER

OUT

12V 0.1A

MAX. TOTAL

The unit (rear)

TRIGGER OUT

1–2 jacks

System connection

input

Yamaha subwoofer that

supports a system connection

7 Connecting the power cable

Before connecting the power cable (General model only)

Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage.

Voltages are AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz.

• Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC

wall outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a

potential fire hazard.

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

220V-

240V

110V-

120V

The unit (rear)

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

To an AC wall outlet

The unit (rear)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PREPARATIONS ➤ Selecting an on-screen menu language En 37

Select the desired on-screen menu language from English

(default), Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and

Chinese.

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display

video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press

ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and

the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired

language.

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

• The information on the front display is provided in English only.

8 Selecting an on-screen menu language

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAN

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

ON SCREEN

ENTER

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 38

The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function

detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to

your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the

speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic

parameters, to suit your room.

• The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control)

technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically

designed for acoustic perfection.

• Note the following regarding YPAO measurement.

– Test tones are output at high volume and may surprise or frighten small children.

– Test tone volume cannot be adjusted.

– Keep the room as quiet as possible.

– Stay in a corner of the room behind the listening position so that you do not

become an obstacle between speakers and the YPAO microphone.

– Do not connect headphones.

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display

video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If

the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to

maximum.

According to your speaker configuration, configure

the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.111) in the

“Setup” menu.

For the basic speaker configuration (p.16): set to “Basic”

(default).

For any of the advanced speaker configurations (p.20): set

to the appropriate setting.

Place the YPAO microphone at your listening

position and connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the

front panel.

• Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your

ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can

use the tripod screws to stabilize the microphone.

9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)

VOLUME HIGH CUT

CROSSOVER/

MIN MAXMIN MAX

YPAO MIC

The unit (front)

YPAO

microphone

Ear height

YPAO MIC

jack

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAN

RETURN

ENTE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 39

The following screen appears on the TV.

• To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting

the measurement.

If desired, change the measuring method

(multi/single).

a Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” and press ENTER.

b Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER.

Settings

• If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to

enjoy surround sound in a wider space.

• If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening

position you will be seated most frequently.

This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the

measurement.

When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”:

“Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)” (p.41)

When “Multi Position” is set to “No”:

“Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.40)

Yes

Select this option if you will have several listening

positions or if you want others to enjoy surround sound.

You can take measurements at up to 8 different

positions in the room. The speaker settings will be

optimized to suit the area defined by those positions

(multi measure).

No (default)

Select this option if your listening position will always be

fixed. Take the measurements at only one position. The

speaker settings will be optimized to suit that position

(single measure).

a b

bac

Multi measure

(5 listening positions)

Multi measure

(2 listening positions + front/back)

Multi measure

(1 listening position + front/back/left/right)

Single measure

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAN

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

ENTER

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 40

Measuring at one listening position

(single measure)

When “Multi Position” is set to “No”, follow the procedure below for

measurement. It takes about 3 minutes to perform the

measurement.

To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to

select “Measure” and press ENTER.

The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER

again to start the measurement immediately.

• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.

The following screen appears on the TV when the

measurement finishes.

• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1)

appears, see “Error messages” (p.44) or “Warning messages” (p.45).

• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see

“Checking the measurement results” (p.43).

Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and

press ENTER.

To save the measurement results, use the cursor

keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

The adjusted speaker settings are applied.

• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO”

to enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER.

• If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are

automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy

natural sounds even at low volume.

• You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.97) in the

“Option” menu.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

ENTER

RETURN

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 41

Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.

This completes optimization of the speaker settings.

Measuring at multiple listening positions

(multi measure)

When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below for

measurement. It takes about 10 minutes to measure 8 listening

positions.

• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears,

see “Error messages” (p.44) or “Warning messages” (p.45).

To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to

select “Measure” and press ENTER.

The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER

again to start the measurement immediately.

• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.

The following screen appears on the TV when the

measurement at the first position finishes.

Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening

position and press ENTER.

Repeat step 2 until measurements at all listening positions

(up to 8) have been taken.

Caution

• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere

where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on

top of AV equipment).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

ENTER

RETURN

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 42

When the measurements at the positions you want

to measure are completed, use the cursor keys to

select “CANCEL” and press ENTER.

When you have taken measurements at 8 listening

positions, the following screen appears automatically.

• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see

“Checking the measurement results” (p.43).

Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and

press ENTER.

To save the measurement result, use the cursor

keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

The adjusted speaker settings are applied.

• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO”

to enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER.

• If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are

automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy

natural sounds even at low volume.

• You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.97) in the

“Option” menu.

Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.

This completes optimization of the speaker settings.

Caution

• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere

where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on

top of AV equipment).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAN

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

ENTER

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 43

Checking the measurement results

You can check the YPAO measurement results.

After the measurement, use the cursor keys to

select “Result” and press ENTER.

• You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.109) in the “Setup” menu,

which displays the previous measurement results.

The following screen appears.

1 Measurement result items

2 Measurement result details

3 The number of measured positions (when multi

measure is performed)

Use the cursor keys to select an item.

To finish checking the results and return to the

previous screen, press RETURN.

Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments

When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not

suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings

and reload the previous YPAO adjustments.

In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto

Setup”, and then “Result” (p.108).

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and

press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Wiring

Polarity of each speaker

Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the

reverse polarity (+/-).

Size

Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the

subwoofer)

Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency

signals effectively.

Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency

signals effectively.

Distance Distance from the listening position to each speaker

Level Output level adjustment for each speaker

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

ON SCREEN

ENTER

RETURN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 44

Error messages

If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again.

Error message Cause Remedy

E-1:No Front SP Front speakers are not detected.

Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections.E-2:No Sur. SP One of the surround speakers cannot be detected.

E-3:No F.PRNS SP One of the front presence speakers cannot be detected.

E-4:SBR → SBL A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only.

When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the

on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speaker.

E-5:Noisy The noise is too loud.

Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select

“PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected.

E-6:Check Sur.

Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround

speakers are connected.

Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen

instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speakers.

E-7:No MIC The YPAO microphone has been removed.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the

measurement again.

E-8:No Signal The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the

measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service

center.

E-9:User Cancel The measurement has been canceled. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”.

E-10:Internal Err. An internal error has occurred.

Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact

the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 45

Warning messages

If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions.

However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings.

Warning message Cause Remedy

W-1:Out of Phase

A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity

(+/-).

Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.43) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by

“Reverse”.

If the speaker is connected incorrectly:

Turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable.

If the speaker is connected correctly:

Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are

connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message.

W-2:Over Distance

A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening

position.

Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.43) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m

(80 ft) of the listening position.

W-3:Level Error

There are significant volume differences between the

speakers.

Select “Level” in “Result” (p.43) and check the speaker identified by “Over ±10.0dB”, then check the usage

environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. We recommend

using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as possible.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network device wirelessly En 46

Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a

wireless connection.

Selecting the connection method

Select a connection method according to your network environment.

■ Connecting with a wireless router (access point)

Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point).

You can enjoy Internet radio, AirPlay, or music files stored on media servers (PC/NAS)

on the unit.

For details on connection, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.47).

• You cannot use the wireless network connection simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection

(p.34) or Wireless Direct (p.52).

• If the unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart, the unit may not connect to a wireless

router (access point). In such case, place them close to each other.

■ Connecting without a wireless router (access point)

Connect a mobile device to the unit directly.

You can use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” to control the

unit from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on the unit.

For details on connection, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly

(Wireless Direct)” (p.52).

• You cannot use Wireless Direct simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection (p.34) or the

wireless network connection (p.47).

• When Wireless Direct is enabled, the following functions are not available.

– Internet radio

–Network services

– Playback of music stored on media servers (PC/NAS)

• For details on “AV CONTROLLER”, visit the Yamaha website.

10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly

The unit

Wireless router

Mobile device

(such as iPhone)

Internet

Modem

The unit

Mobile device

(such as iPhone)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network device wirelessly En 47

Connecting the unit to a wireless network

There are several methods to connect the unit to a wireless

network.

Select a connection method according to your environment.

■ A: Sharing the iOS device setting

You can easily setup a wireless connection by applying the

connection settings on iOS devices (iPhone/iPad/iPod touch).

Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a

wireless router.

• You need iOS device with iOS 5.0 or later. For details on supported devices, see

“Supported devices and file formats” (p.145).

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display

video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to

the unit via HDMI.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press

ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network

Connection” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check

“Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”.

• The checkmark indicates the current setting.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check

“Share Wi-Fi Settings (iOS)” and select “NEXT”.

Yes

Do you own iOS devices

(iPhone/iPad/iPod touch)?

Yes

A (p.47)

B (p.48)

Does your wireless router

(access point) has a WPS

button?

C (p.49)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

ON SCREEN

ENTER

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network device wirelessly En 48

Connect the iOS device to the USB jack, and disable

the screen lock on the iOS device.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “NEXT” and

press ENTER.

Tap “Allow” in the message appeared on the iOS

device.

When the connection process finishes, “Completed”

appears on the TV screen.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ B: Using the WPS push button

configuration

You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the

WPS button.

• This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router

(access point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method.

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.

Hold down INFO (WPS) on the front panel for 3

seconds.

“Press WPS button on Access Point” appears on the front

display.

Push the WPS button on the wireless router (access

point).

When the connection process finishes, “Completed”

appears on the front display.

If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try

another connection method.

DISPLAY

RETURN

VIDEO AUX

ZONE

CONTROL

YPAO MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

VIDEO

RLAUDIO

5V 2.1A

The unit (front)

About WPS

WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance,

which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

ON SCREEN

ENTER

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network device wirelessly En 49

■ C: Using other connection methods

If your wireless router (access point) does not support WPS push

button configuration method, follow the procedure below to

configure the wireless network settings.

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display

video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to

the unit via HDMI.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press

ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network

Connection” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check

“Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”.

• The checkmark indicates the current setting.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the

desired connection method and select “NEXT”.

The following connection methods are available.

WPS Button

You can set up a wireless connection with the

WPS button while viewing the TV screen. Follow

the instructions displayed on the TV screen.

Share Wi-Fi

Settings (iOS)

See “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.47).

Access Point

Scan

You can set up a wireless connection by

searching for an access point. For details on

settings, see “Searching for an access point”

(p.50).

Manual Setting

You can setup a wireless connection by entering

the required information (such as SSID)

manually. For details on settings, see “Setting up

the wireless connection manually” (p.50).

PIN Code

You can set up a wireless connection by entering

the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router

(access point). The method is available if the

wireless router (access point) supports the WPS

PIN code method. For details on settings, see

“Using the PIN code” (p.51).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

ON SCREEN

ENTER

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network device wirelessly En 50

❑ Searching for an access point

If you select “Access Point Scan” as the connection method, the

unit starts searching for access points. After a while, the list of

available access points appears on the TV screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the

desired access point and select “NEXT”.

The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the

security key and select “NEXT”.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT”

and press ENTER to start the connection process.

When the connection process finishes, “Completed”

appears on the TV screen.

If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try

another connection method.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

❑ Setting up the wireless connection manually

If you select “Manual Setting” as the connection method, the

wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.

You need to setup the SSID (network name), encryption method

and security key for your network.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of

the access point and select “NEXT”.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the

security method of the access point and select

“NEXT”.

Settings

None, WEP, WPA-PSK (TKIP), WPA-PSK (AES), WPA2-PSK (AES),

Mixed Mode

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

ON SCREEN

ENTER

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network device wirelessly En 51

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the

security key and select “NEXT”.

If you select “None” in Step 2, this setting is not available.

Proceed to Step 4.

If you select “WEP”, enter either 5 or 13 character string, or

10 or 26 hexadecimal digits.

If you select other method, enter either 8 to 63 character

string, or 64 hexadecimal digits.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT”

and press ENTER to start the connection process.

When the connection process finishes, “Completed”

appears on the TV screen.

If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is

entered correctly, and repeat from Step 1.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

❑ Using the PIN code

If you select “PIN Code” as the connection method, the list of

available access points appears on the TV screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the

desired access point and select “NEXT”.

The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen.

Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router

(access point).

For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the

wireless router (access point).

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT”

and press ENTER to start the connection process.

When the connection process finishes, “Completed”

appears on the TV screen.

If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try

another connection method.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

ON SCREEN

ENTER

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network device wirelessly En 52

Connecting a mobile device to the unit

directly (Wireless Direct)

Follow the procedure below to connect a mobile device to the unit

directly.

• Wireless Direct connection may be insecure since the communication is not

strongly encrypted. The unit may operate by playback operation on wireless

devices connected to the unit without permission.

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display

video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to

the unit via HDMI.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press

ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network

Connection” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check

“Wireless Direct” and select “OK”.

• The checkmark indicates the current setting.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the

desired security method and select “NEXT”.

Settings

None, WEP

• If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the

communication is not encrypted.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

ON SCREEN

ENTER

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network device wirelessly En 53

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the

security key and select “NEXT”.

If you select “None” in Step 8, this setting is not available.

Proceed to Step 10.

Otherwise, enter either 5 or 13 character string.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “OK” and press

ENTER to save the setting.

The settings made appear on the TV screen.

The SSID and security key information is required for setup

of a mobile device.

Configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device.

For details on settings of your mobile device, refer to the

instruction manual of the mobile device.

a Enable the Wi-Fi function on the mobile device.

b Select the SSID displayed in Step 10 from the list of available

access points.

c When you are prompted for a password, enter the security key

displayed in Step 10.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

ON SCREEN

ENTER

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Basic playback procedure En 54

PLAYBACK

Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or

BD/DVD player) connected to the unit.

Use the input selection keys to select an input

source.

Start playback on the external device or select a

radio station.

Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.

For details on the following operations, see the

corresponding pages.

• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.63)

• Playing back iPod music (p.70)

• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device

(p.73)

• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

(p.76)

• Listening to Internet radio (p.80)

• Playing back music with AirPlay (p.83)

Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.

• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.

• To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or

TONE/BALANCE on the front panel (p.97).

On-screen input selection

a Press ON SCREEN.

b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.

c Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and

press ENTER.

Selecting an HDMI output jack

Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack.

Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be

used for signal output changes.

• You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.55).

• When “OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest

resolution supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For

example, if you have connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p

TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, the unit outputs 720p video signals.)

• If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 (“HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.122)), you

can turn on/off each zone by pressing HDMI OUT repeatedly.

Basic playback procedure

OUT 1+2

Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1

and HDMI OUT 2 jacks.

OUT 1

Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack.

OUT 2

Off Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

OUT1+2

HDMIOUTSel.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAN

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

R. DE

ON SCREEN

ENTER

VOLUME

MUTE

HDMI OUT

Cursor keys

Input selection keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) En 55

The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, HDMI output and various settings with just one touch.

You can use up to 12 scenes to register your favorite settings and switch them depending on a playback source.

Press SCENE.

The input source and settings registered to the

corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on

automatically when it is in standby mode.

By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.

• You can select SCENE 1–4 by pressing SCENE on the remote control.

Additionally, you can create 8 scenes (SCENE 5–12) and select those scenes

from the “Scene” menu (p.102).

On-screen scene selection

a Press ON SCREEN.

b Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.

c Use the cursor keys to select a desired scene and press

ENTER.

Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)

SCENE (SCENE key) 1 (BD/DVD) 2 (TV) 3 (NET) 4 (RADIO)

Input

Input (p.54) AV 1 AUDIO 1 NET RADIO TUNER

Audio Select (p.99) Auto Auto — —

HDMI Output HDMI Output (p.54) OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2

Mode

Sound Program (p.57) Sci-Fi STRAIGHT 7ch Stereo 7ch Stereo

Pure Direct Mode (p.115) Auto Auto Auto Auto

Enhancer (p.62) Off On On On

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

ON SCREEN

ENTER

SCENE

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) En 56

Configuring scene assignments

Set the unit to the condition (such as input source

and sound program) that you want to assign to a

scene.

Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET

Complete” appears on the front display.

• The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external

device connected to the unit via HDMI. To enable SCENE link playback, specify

the device type in “Device Control” (p.103) in the “Scene” menu.

• (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only)

To control your playback device after selecting a scene with the remote control of

the unit, change the external device assigned to the SCENE keys. For details,

refer to “Supplement for Remote Control” in the supplied CD-ROM.

Selecting setting items to be included as

scene assignments

In addition to the default scene assignments (Input, HDMI Output

and Mode), you can also include the following setting items as the

scene assignments in “Detail” (p.103) in the “Scene” menu.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SETComplete

SCENE1

Sound

Tone Control, YPAO Volume, Adaptive DRC,

Extra Bass

Surround

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode, Dialogue Lift, Dialogue

Level, Subwoofer Trim, Extended Surround

Video Video Mode

Vol ume Master Volume

Lipsync Lipsync, Delay

Speaker Setup Setting Pattern, PEQ Select

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAN

RETURN

ENTE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

SCENE

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 57

The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and

surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with

your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo

playback).

❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for movies

• Press MOVIE repeatedly.

This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing

video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games (p.58).

❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for music or

stereo playback

• Press MUSIC repeatedly.

This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening

music sources or stereo playback (p.59).

❑ Selecting a surround decoder

• Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly.

This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from

2-channel sources (p.61).

❑ Switching to the straight decode mode

• Press STRAIGHT.

This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels

(p.61).

❑ Switching to the Pure Direct mode

• Press PURE DIRECT.

This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the

electrical noise from other circuitry (p.62).

❑ Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer

• Press ENHANCER.

This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth

and breadth (p.62).

On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection

a Press ON SCREEN.

b Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press

ENTER.

c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround

decoder and press ENTER.

• You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing

PROGRAM.

• You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in

the “Sound Program” menu (p.104).

• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.

• When you play back audio signals with a sampling rate of higher than 96 kHz, the

straight decode mode (p.61) is automatically selected.

• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the

speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.10) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in

the “Information” menu (p.126).

Selecting the sound mode

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

1 2 3

NIN

PRE

BAN

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

P-

MEN

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

BD/DVD

RADI

AUX

1 2

MOVIE

MUSIC

SUR.DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

ON SCREEN

ENTER

PROGRAM

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 58

Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D)

The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP

technology (CINEMA DSP 3D). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual

movie theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound

fields.

• To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.115) in the “Setup” menu to “Off”.

• We recommend using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the stereoscopic

sound fields. However, even when no front presence speakers are connected, the unit creates Virtual

Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce stereoscopic sound

fields. When VPS is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.

■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)

The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as

movies, TV programs, and games.

❑ MOVIE THEATER

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

HallinVienna

CLASSICAL

MUSIC

“CINEMA DSP n” lights up

Sound program category

Sound program

Standard

This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling

without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio,

such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the

ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful

reverberations from the left, right, and rear.

Spectacle

This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie

productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the

cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing

everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms.

Sci-Fi

This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the

latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of

cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear

separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music.

Adventure

This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and

adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but

puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides,

powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth

creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation

of the sounds and the separation of the channels.

Drama

This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of

movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The

reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects

and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not

impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for

long periods.

Mono Movie

This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies,

in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a

pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate

reverberation to the original audio.

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 59

❑ ENTERTAINMENT

■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback

(MUSIC)

The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.

You can also select stereo playback.

❑ CLASSICAL

❑ LIVE/CLUB

❑ STEREO

• CINEMA DSP 3D (p.58) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.60) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo” is

selected.

Sports

This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts

and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’

voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the

stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of

the fans in a suitable space.

Action Game

This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting

games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player

feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater

concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music

Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field.

Roleplaying Game

This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This

program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction

of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of

scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music

Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field.

Music Video

This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as

if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere

thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence

sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround

sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.

Hall in Munich

This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500

seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful

reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s

virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.

Hall in Vienna

This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a

shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings

create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience,

producing a very full, rich sound.

Chamber

This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an

audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable

for courtly music and chamber music.

Cellar Club

This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and

homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds

that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small

stage.

The Roxy Theatre

This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert

venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the

hall.

The Bottom Line

This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a

famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left

and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.

2ch Stereo

Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When

multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and

output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).

7ch Stereo

Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back

multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and

then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger

sound field and is ideal for background music at parties.

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 60

■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers

(Virtual CINEMA DSP)

If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) when no

surround speakers are connected, the unit utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround

technology to reproduce up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the

well-oriented sound field only with the front-side speakers. We recommend using

presence speakers in order to enjoy more effective stereoscopic sound field.

• When Virtual CINEMA DSP is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.

■ Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in

front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)

If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your

room, you can place them in the front (p.17) and enjoy multi-channel surround sound

using Virtual CINEMA FRONT.

When “Layout (Surround)” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, the unit creates

the virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multi-channel

surround sound with the 5 speakers placed in the front.

• When Virtual CINEMA FRONT is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.

■ Enjoying surround sound with headphones

(SILENT CINEMA)

You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with

stereo headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting

a sound program or a surround decoder.

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 61

Enjoying unprocessed playback

You can play back input sources without any sound field effect

processing.

■ Playing back in original channels

(straight decode)

When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces

stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as

CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for

multichannel sources.

Press STRAIGHT.

Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is

enabled or disabled.

• To enable 6.1/7.1-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround

back speakers are used, set “Extended Surround” (p.116) in the “Setup” menu to

a setting other than “Off”.

• If “Layout (Surround)” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, Virtual

CINEMA FRONT (p.60) works when multi-channel source is played back.

■ Playing back 2-channel sources in

multichannel (surround decoder)

The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel

playback from 2-channel sources. When a multichannel source is

input, it works the same way as the straight decode mode.

For details on each decoder see “Glossary” (p.142).

Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder.

Each time you press the key, the surround decoder

changes.

• You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are

connected or when “Surround Back” (p.112) in the “Setup” menu is set to

“None”.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

STRAIGHT

bPro Logic

Uses the Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all

sources.

bPLIIx Movie

Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro

Logic II decoder) suitable for movies.

bPLII Movie

bPLIIx Music

Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro

Logic II decoder) suitable for music.

bPLII Music

bPLIIx Game

Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro

Logic II decoder) suitable for games.

bPLII Game

Neo:6 Cinema Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for movies.

Neo:6 Music Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for music.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

ProLogic

SUR.DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

1 2 3

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAN

RETURN

ENTE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

INF

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

RADI

AUX

STRAIGHT

SUR.DECODE

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 62

Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct)

When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the

selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the

electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It

allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.

Press PURE DIRECT.

Each time you press the key, the Pure Direct mode is

enabled or disabled.

• When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the following functions are not available.

– Some settings for the speakers or sound programs

– Operating the on-screen menu and some items in the “Option” menu

– Using the multi-zone function

– Output from the AV OUT jacks

– Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)

Enjoying compressed music with enhanced

sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)

Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the

sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original

sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along

with any other sound modes.

Press ENHANCER.

Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer

is enabled or disabled.

• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling

rate is over 48 kHz.

• You can also use “Enhancer” (p.98) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable

Compressed Music Enhancer.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

PUREDIRECT

SBL SBRSB

CL R

VOLUME

ENHANCER

EnhancerOn

“ENHANCER” lights up

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

1 2 3

NIN

PRE

BAN

RETURN

ENTE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

RADI

AUX

1 2

R. DE

PURE DIRECT

ENHANCER

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 63

You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or

selecting from registered radio stations.

• The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is

being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used

in U.K. and Europe models.

• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM

antennas.

Setting the frequency steps

(Asia and General models only)

At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and

9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the

frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM.

Set the unit to standby mode.

When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel,

press MAIN ZONE z.

Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TUNER FRQ

STEP”.

Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”.

Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby

mode and turn it on again.

Selecting a frequency for reception

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM).

Use the following keys to set a frequency.

TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the

key for about a second to search stations automatically.

Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to

select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).

“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio

station.

“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.

• “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of

reception range.

• (U.S.A. model only)

You can switch between “Auto” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio

reception in “Audio Mode” (p.99) in the “Option” menu. When the signal

reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may

improve it. (HD Radio programs are not available when the unit is in the

monaural reception mode.)

• (Except for U.S.A. model)

You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM

radio reception in “FM Mode” (p.99) in the “Option” menu. When the signal

reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may

improve it.

Listening to FM/AM radio

MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT

PROGRAM

OUT

ZONE

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

FM50/AM9

TUNERFRQSTEP

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CLR

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

FM87.50MHz

SBL SBRSB

CL R

VOLUME

TUNEDSTEREO

FM98.50MHz

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

ENHAN

PRE

RETURN

ENTE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

TUNING

BAND

TUNER

Numeric keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 64

Registering favorite radio stations (presets)

You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have

registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their

preset numbers.

• You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals and HD

Radio stations (U.S.A. model only) by using “Auto Preset” (p.67, p.69).

■ Registering a radio station

Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.

Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.63)

to tune into the desired radio station.

• (U.S.A. model only)

To register a specific HD Radio program, select an audio program (p.65)

after tuning into the radio station.

Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.

The first time that you do register a station, the selected

radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”.

Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered

to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most

recently registered number.

• To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning

into the desired radio station, use PRESET or numeric keys to select a

preset number, and then press MEMORY again.

■ Selecting a preset station

Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio

station.

You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by

using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.

• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.

• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.

• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.

• To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.67, p.69).

SBL SBRSB

CL R

VOLUME

TUNEDSTEREO

PresetOK

Preset

01:FM98.50MHz

Preset number

SBL SBRSB

CL R

VOLUME

TUNEDSTEREO

FM98.50MHz

Preset

01:Empty

“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered

SBL SBRSB

CL R

VOLUME

TUNEDSTEREO

Preset

01:FM98.50MHz

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

ENHAN

NIN

BAN

RETURN

ENTE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

MEMORY

PRESET

TUNER

Numeric keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 65

HD Radio™ tuning

(U.S.A. model only)

HD Radio Technology is a new technology that enables FM/AM

radio stations to broadcast programs digitally. Digital broadcasting

provides listeners with radically improved audio quality and

reception as well as new data services. Furthermore, supplemental

program services allow listeners to select from up to 8 HD Radio

programs multicast on a single FM HD Radio channel. For further

information on HD Radio Technology, visit

“http://www.ibiquity.com/”.

The unit is equipped with an HD Radio reception feature, facilitating

CD quality FM broadcasts as well as analog FM stereo quality AM

broadcasts. In addition, the unit can receive both audio and data

(such as song titles, artist names, album titles and program types)

from all HD Radio programs (HD1 to HD8).

When tuning into an HD Radio station

• The unit is capable of receiving both hybrid and all-digital FM/AM radio stations. If

you cannot search the desired all-digital HD Radio station by holding down

TUNING, enter the frequency directly using the numeric keys.

• When the unit is in the monaural reception mode (p.99), you can tune into the

analog part of a hybrid HD Radio station only.

■ Selecting an HD Radio™ audio program

You can select an audio program when the unit is tuned into an HD

Radio station that provides multiple audio programs (up to 8).

Press MODE repeatedly to select a desired audio

program.

You can also enter an audio program number (1 to 8)

directly by using the numeric keys. For example, to select

program 3, press 3 and then ENT (or just leave it).

■ Displaying the HD Radio™ information

You can switch the HD Radio information displayed on the front display.

Press INFO.

Each time you press the key, the item switches.

About 3 seconds later, the information is displayed.

• Some audio programs may not provide information depending on the station

or period of time.



Program Service Data: Contributes to the superior user experience

of HD RadioTechnology. Presents song name, artist, station IDs,

HD2/HD3 Channel Guide, and other relevant data streams.



Adjacent to traditional main stations are extra local FM channels.

These HD2/HD3 Channels provide new, original music as well as

deep cuts into traditional genre.



Digital, CD-quality sound. HD Radio Technology enables local radio

stations to broadcast a clean digital signal. AM sounds like today’s

FM and FM sounds like a CD.

VOLUME

SBL SBR

CL R

TUNED

WXYZ-FM

FM88.9MHz1

HD1/3

Relative/total program number

(when multiple programs are available)

“HD” lights up Absolute program number

(when multiple programs are available)

Station Info Frequency, station name (call sign)

Category Station name (call sign), program category

Artist/Song Station name (call sign), artist name/song title

Album Station name (call sign), album title

DSP Program Frequency, sound program selected on the unit

Audio Decoder Frequency, decoder selected on the unit

VOLUME

SBL SBR

CL R

TUNED

WXYZ-FM

FM88.9MHz3

HD2/3

VOLUME

SBL SBR

CL R

TUNED

Category

Info

Item name

VOLUME

SBL SBR

CL R

TUNED

RhythmandBlu

WXYZ-FM

FM88.9-1

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

ENHAN

PRE

BAN

RETURN

ENTE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

ENT

MODE

INFO

TUNING

Numeric keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 66

■ HD Radio™ operation on the TV

You can view the HD Radio information or select a radio station on

the TV.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

❑ Playback screen

1 Radio station information

Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected

band (FM/AM) and frequency.

When tuning into an HD Radio station, the selected audio program

number and HD Radio information (station name [call sign], program

category, artist name, album name and song title) are also displayed.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

2 HD indicator

Lights up when an HD Radio station signal is received.

3 TUNED/STEREO indicators

“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.

“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.

4 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

Menu Submenu Function

Manual Tuning

Switches to FM/AM.

Tuning (+/-) Selects a frequency.

Auto (+/-) Selects a radio station automatically.

Program (+/-)

Selects an audio program (when

multiple audio programs are

available).

Memory

Registers the selected station as

presets.

Direct Enters a frequency directly.

Browse

Moves to the browse screen (preset

station list).

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows

the background. Press one of the

menu operation keys to redisplay it.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

ENTER

RETURN

TUNER

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 67

■ Browse screen

1 Preset station list

Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a

preset station and press ENTER to tune into it.

2 Preset number

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

• If HD Radio stations are detected by “Auto Preset”, only the audio program 1

(HD1) will be registered. If you want to register a specific HD Radio program,

Radio Data System tuning

(U.K. and Europe models only)

Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM

stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of

Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program

Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio

Data System broadcasting station.

■

Displaying the Radio Data System information

Tune into the desired Radio Data System

broadcasting station.

• We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System

broadcasting stations (p.69).

Press INFO.

Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.

About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for

the displayed item appears.

Menu Submenu Function

Utility

Memory

Registers the current station to the

preset number selected in the list.

Auto Preset

Automatically registers HD Radio

(FM/AM) stations and FM radio

stations with strong signals (up to 40

stations).

Clear Preset

Clear the preset station selected in the

list.

Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations.

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the

list.

1 Page Down

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows

the background. Press one of the

menu operation keys to redisplay it.

Program Service Program service name

Program Type Current program type

Radio Text Information on the current program

Clock Time Current time

DSP Program Sound mode name

Audio Decoder Decoder name

VOLUME

SBL SBR

CL R

STEREO TUNED

ProgramType

Info

Item name

VOLUME

SBL SBR

CL R

STEREO TUNED

CLASSICS

FM98.50MHz

Information

Frequency (always displayed)

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

INFO

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 68

• “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not

displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System

service.

■ Receiving traffic information

automatically

When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit

automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function,

follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station.

When “TUNER” is selected as the input source,

press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program”

(TrafficProgram) and press ENTER.

The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds.

Press ENTER again to start the search immediately.

• To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor

keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed.

• To cancel the search, press RETURN.

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the

search finishes.

• “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information

stations are found.

Operating the radio on the TV

You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the

TV.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

■ Playback screen

1 Radio station information

Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected

band (FM/AM) and frequency.

(U.K. and Europe models only)

When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.67), the

Radio Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,”

“Radio Text” and “Clock Time”) is also displayed.

2 Band icon

(Except for U.K. and Europe models)

Select this icon and press ENTER to switch between FM and AM.

3 TUNED/STEREO indicators

“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.

“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.

4 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

VOLUME

SBL SBR

CL R

STEREO TUNED

TPFM101.30MHz

TrafficProgram

Finished

Traffic information station (frequency)

• (U.S.A. model only)

See “HD Radio™ operation on the TV” (p.66) to operate the radio on the TV.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAN

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

TUNER

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 69

■ Browse screen

1 Preset station list

Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a

preset station and press ENTER to tune into it.

2 Preset number

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

• (U.K. and Europe models only)

Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto

Preset”.

Menu Submenu Function

Manual Tuning

(U.K. and Europe models only)

Switches to FM/AM.

Tuning (+/-) Selects a frequency.

Auto (+/-) Selects a radio station automatically.

Memory

Registers the selected station as

presets.

Direct Enters a frequency directly.

Browse

Moves to the browse screen (preset

station list).

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows

the background. Press one of the

menu operation keys to redisplay it.

Menu Submenu Function

Utility

Memory

Registers the current station to the

preset number selected in the list.

Auto Preset

Automatically registers FM radio

stations with strong signals (up to 40

stations).

Clear Preset

Clear the preset station selected in the

list.

Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations.

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the

list.

1 Page Down

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows

the background. Press one of the

menu operation keys to redisplay it.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 70

You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable

supplied with the iPod.

• For details on playable iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats”

(p.145).

Connecting an iPod

Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the

iPod.

Connect the USB cable to the iPod.

Connect the USB cable to the USB jack.

• The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby

mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If

“Network Standby” (p.119) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to

charge without limit.

• Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use.

Playback of iPod content

Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start

playback.

You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen.

Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

• If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed.

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback

screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

• To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the

simple play mode (p.72).

Playing back iPod music

OPTION

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY

RETURN

YPAO MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

TONE/BALANCE

STRAIGHT

PROGRAM

ENTER

5V 2.1A

The unit (front)

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

Connected

USB

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

ENTER

RETURN

USB

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 71

■ Browse screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.72) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 List name

3 Contents list

Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total

5 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

■ Playback screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.72) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining

time.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

• You can also use the external device operation keys on the remote control to

control playback.

Menu Function

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

1 Page Down

10 Pages Up

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

10 Pages Down

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

Menu Submenu Function

Play Control

a Resumes playback from pause.

s Stops playback.

d Stops playback temporarily.

Skips forward/backward.

Searches forward/backward (by holding

down).

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu

operation keys to redisplay it.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 72

■ Operating the iPod itself or remote control

(simple play)

Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode.

The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are

enabled.

To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again.

Operate your iPod itself or the remote control to

start playback.

■ Shuffle/repeat settings

You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings of your iPod.

• During simple play, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly on your iPod or

press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below.

When “USB” is selected as the input source, press

OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or

“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Operational remote control

keys

Function

Cursor keys Select an item.

ENTER Confirms the selection.

RETURN Returns to the previous screen.

External device

operation keys

Starts playback or stops playback

temporarily.

s Stops playback.

Skips forward/backward.

Searches forward/backward (by holding

down).

Item Setting Function

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.

Songs (Songs)

Plays back songs in random order.

“x” appears in the TV screen.

Albums

(Albums)

Plays back albums in random order.

“x” appears in the TV screen.

Repeat

(Repeat)

Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.

“c” appears in the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs repeatedly.

“v” appears in the TV screen.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

MODE

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 73

You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on

the unit.

The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or

FAT32 format).

• For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats”

(p.145).

Connecting a USB storage device

Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.

• If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In

this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display.

• Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack.

• Connect a USB memory device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use

extension cables.

Playback of USB storage device contents

Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device

contents and start playback.

You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed

on the TV screen.

Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

• If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is

displayed.

Playing back music stored on a USB storage device

OPTION

SCREEN

DISPLAY

RETURN

YPAO MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

TONE/BALANCE

STRAIGHT

PROGRAM

ENTER

5V 2.1A

The unit (front)

USB storage device

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

Connected

USB

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAN

RETURN

ENTE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

USB

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 74

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback

screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.

• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden

files) during playback, playback stops automatically.

■ Browse screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.75) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 List name

3 Contents list

Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys

(q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total

5 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

Menu Function

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

1 Page Down

10 Pages Up

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

10 Pages Down

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 75

■ Playback screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.75) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

• You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on

the remote control to control playback.

■ Shuffle/repeat settings

You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB

storage device contents.

When “USB” is selected as the input source, press

OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or

“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Menu Submenu Function

Play Control

a Resumes playback from pause.

s Stops playback.

d Stops playback temporarily.

Skips forward/backward.

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu

operation keys to redisplay it.

Item Setting Function

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.

On (On)

Plays back songs in the current album

(folder) in random order.

“x” appears on the TV screen.

Repeat

(Repeat)

Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.

“c” appears on the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs in the current album

(folder) repeatedly.

“v” appears on the TV screen.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 76

You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit.

• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.34). You can check

whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network”

(p.127) in the “Information” menu.

• The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired

network connection.

• For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.145).

Media sharing setup

To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to

configure the media sharing setting on each music server.

■ For a PC with Windows Media Player installed

❑ For Windows Media Player 12

Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC.

Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”.

Click “Turn on media streaming”.

Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s model

name.

Click “OK” to exit.

❑ For Windows Media Player 11

Start Windows Media Player 11 on your PC.

Select “Library”, then “Media Sharing”.

Check the “Share my media to” box, select the unit’s icon, and click

“Allow”.

Click “OK” to exit.

• For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help.

■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software

installed

Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media

sharing settings.

Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 77

Playback of PC music contents

Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and

start playback.

You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV

screen.

Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the

input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

• If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the

playback screen is displayed.

Use the cursor keys to select a music server and

press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback

screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.

• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden

files) during playback, playback stops automatically.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

ENTER

RETURN

NET

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 78

■ Browse screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.79) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 List name

3 Contents list

Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total

5 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

■ Playback screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.79) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

• You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on

the remote control to control playback.

• You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control

playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.101).

Menu Function

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

1 Page Down

10 Pages Up

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

10 Pages Down

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

Menu Submenu Function

Play Control

a Resumes playback from pause.

s Stops playback.

d Stops playback temporarily.

Skips forward/backward.

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation

keys to redisplay it.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 79

■ Shuffle/repeat settings

You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC

music content.

When “SERVER” is selected as the input source,

press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or

“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Item Setting Function

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.

On (On)

Plays back songs in the current album

(folder) in random order.

“x” appears on the TV screen.

Repeat

(Repeat)

Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.

“c” appears on the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs in the current album

(folder) repeatedly.

“v” appears on the TV screen.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAN

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 80

You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.

• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.34). You can

check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly

assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.127) in the “Information” menu.

• You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.

• The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service.

• This service may be discontinued without notice.

Playback of Internet radio

Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the

input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and

the playback screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

Listening to Internet radio

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

ENTER

RETURN

NET

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 81

■ Browse screen

1 Playback indicator

2 List name

3 Contents list

Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to

select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total

5 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

■ Playback screen

1 Playback indicator

2 Playback information

Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

• You can also use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to

stop playback.

• Some information may not be available depending on the station.

Menu Function

Bookmark On

(Bookmark Off)

Adds/removes the station selected in the list to/from

the “Bookmarks” folder (p.82).

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

1 Page Down

10 Pages Up

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

10 Pages Down

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

Menu Submenu Function

Bookmark On

Adds the current station to the

“Bookmarks” folder (p.82).

Play Control s Stops playback.

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu

operation keys to redisplay it.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 82

Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks)

By registering your favorite Internet radio stations to “Bookmarks”,

you can quickly access to them from the “Bookmarks” folder in the

browse screen.

■ Registering the station on the

browse/playback screen

Select the desired Internet radio station in the

browse screen or start playback of it to display the

playback screen.

Press the cursor key (r) to select “Bookmark On”

and press ENTER.

The selected station is added to the “Bookmarks” folder.

• To remove stations from the “Bookmarks” folder, select the station in the

“Bookmarks” folder and then “Bookmark Off”.

■ Registering the station on the vTuner

website

Select any of Internet radio stations on the unit.

This operation is necessary to register the radio station for

the first time.

Check the vTuner ID of the unit.

You can find the vTuner ID (MAC address of the unit) in

“Network” (p.127) in the “Information” menu.

Access the vTuner website

(http://yradio.vtuner.com/) with the web browser on

your PC and enter the vTuner ID.

• To use this feature, you need to create your personal account. Create your

account using your e-mail address.

Click the “Add” icon (

❤

+) next to the station name.

• To remove the station from the “Bookmarks” folder, select “Bookmarks” in

the Home screen, and then click the “Remove” icon (

❤

–) next to the station

name.

You can switch the language.

Enter the vTuner ID in this area.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAN

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

ENTER

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music with AirPlay En 83

The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on the unit via network.

• To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router. You can check

whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network”

(p.127) in the “Information” menu.

• When using a multiple SSID router, access to the unit might be restricted depending on the SSID to

connect. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.

• For details on supported iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.145).

Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents

Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit.

Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback

screen on the iPod.

If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon ( ) appears.

• If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly.

On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit

(network name of the unit) as the audio output device.

Select a song and start playback.

The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback.

The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

Playing back music with AirPlay

iTunes

Router

(wired or wireless)

iPhone/iPad/

iPod touch

The unit

iTunes (example) iPod (example)

Network name of the unit

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music with AirPlay En 84

• You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by

setting “Network Standby” (p.119) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.

• You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on

iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.120) in the “Setup” menu.

• If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the

iTunes/iPod stops automatically.

• You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable

volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.101) in the “Input”

menu to “Off”.

■ Playback screen

1 Playback indicator

2 Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining

time.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

• You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on

the remote control to control playback.

• To control iTunes playback with the remote control of the unit, you need to

configure the iTu nes preferences to enable iTunes control from remote speakers

in advance.

Caution

• When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be

unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the

volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod

immediately.

Menu Submenu Function

Play Control

a Resumes playback from pause.

d Stops playback temporarily.

Skips forward/backward.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation

keys to redisplay it.

iTunes (example of English version)

Check this box

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 85

The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room

where the unit is installed (main zone) and in another room (Zone2).

For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main zone), another person

can listen to radio in the study room (Zone2).

Multi-zone configuration examples

■ Enjoying music in another room

You can enjoy music using speakers placed in another room.

Connections

Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.23

Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.87

• Analog audio sources (including FM/AM radio), and USB and network sources can be output to Zone2. To

enjoy the playback of an external device in Zone2, you need to connect the device to analog audio jacks of

the unit.

■ Enjoying videos/music in another room

You can enjoy videos/music using a TV placed in another room.

❑ Enjoying videos/music using a TV and speakers

Connections

TV (for analog video playback): p.87

Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.23

Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.87

• Analog video/audio sources (including FM/AM radio), and USB and network sources can be output to

Zone2. To enjoy the playback of an external device in Zone2, you need to connect the device to analog

video/audio jacks of the unit.

Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone)

• Video/audio signals that can be output to Zone2 vary depending on how you connect the device in

Zone2 to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see “Multi-zone output” (p.147).

• Since there are many possible ways to use the unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that

you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the multi-zone

connections that best meet your requirements.

Living room (main zone)

Study room

(Zone2)

Audio

(SPEAKERS or

ZONE OUT)

Living room (main zone)

Study room

(Zone2)

Audio

(SPEAKERS or

ZONE OUT)

Video

(ZONE OUT)

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 86

❑ Enjoying videos/music using only a TV

Connection

TV: p.88

• Only HDMI video/audio sources can be output to Zone2. To enjoy the playback of an external device in

Zone2, you need to connect the device to an HDMI jack of the unit.

Preparing Zone2

Connect the device that will be used in Zone2 to the unit.

■ Connecting speakers to play back audio

Connect speakers to play back audio in Zone2. The connection method varies

depending on the amplifier being used (the unit or an external amplifier).

❑ Using the unit’s internal amplifier

Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 to the unit with speaker cables. For details, see

“Connecting Zone2 speakers” (p.23).

Living room (main zone)

Study room

(Zone2)

Video/audio

(HDMI)

Caution

• Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting speakers or an external

amplifier.

• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the

unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit,

“Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 87

❑ Using an external amplifier

Connect the external amplifier (with volume control) placed in Zone2 to the unit with a

stereo pin cable and connect speakers to the external amplifier.

■ Connecting a video monitor to play back analog videos

Connect a video monitor to watch analog videos at Zone2. Depending on the video

input jacks available on your video monitor, choose one of the video connection

methods.

• The video conversion between the analog video jacks does not work for Zone2 video output. To watch

videos played back on a video device on the Zone2 video monitor, you need to connect the video monitor to

the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from the DVD

player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks with a component video cable.

To assign the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks to the Zone2 video monitor, set “Monitor

Out Assign” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2”.

AUDIO

ZONE OUT

ZONE 2

The unit (rear)

ZONE OUT

(ZONE 2) jacks

Zone2

Main zone

External amplifier

Audio input

(analog stereo)

YPB PR

COMPONENT VIDEO

VIDEO

ZONE OUT

MONITOR

OUT

The unit (rear)

ZONE OUT jacks

(COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO)

Zone2

Main zone

Video input

(component video or

composite video)

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 88

■ Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back

videos/audio

Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as a TV) to play back videos/audio at

Zone2. If you connect an AV amplifier, you can enjoy multi-channel playback in another

room (Zone2).

• To watch videos played back on a video device at Zone2, you need to connect the video device to the unit

with an HDMI cable (p.28).

• We recommend that you disable HDMI Control on the playback devices connected to the unit.

• On-screen operations are not available for Zone2.

To assign the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack to Zone2, set “HDMI OUT2 Assign”

(p.122) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2”.

HDMI

HDMI OUT

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

The unit (rear)

HDMI OUT 2

(ZONE OUT) jack

Zone2

Main zone

HDMI input

(Example: using a TV)

HDMI input

(Example: using an AV amplifier)

Zone2

• Videos/audio interruptions may happen in another zone when any of the following operations is

performed.

– Tuning on/off a TV connected to the unit via HDMI or switching the TV input

– Enabling/disabling a zone output or selecting its input source

– Changing the sound mode or audio settings (such as “Extended Surround”)

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 89

■ Operating the unit from Zone2 (remote connection)

You can operate the unit or external devices from Zone2 using the remote control

supplied with each device if you connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit’s

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks.

• (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only)

You can operate external devices with the supplied remote control if you register a remote control code for

each device. For details, refer to “Supplement for Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM.

Remote connections between Yamaha products

An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using Yamaha products that

support remote connections, as the unit does. You can transmit remote control signals

by connecting the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an

infrared signal receiver.

IN OUT

REMOTE

The unit (rear)

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

External device

(such as a CD player)

Remote control

(supplied with each device)

Infrared signal

receiver

Zone2

Main zone

Infrared signal

transmitter

OUT

REMOTE

OUT

REMOTE

Remote control

Infrared signal

receiver

Yamaha products

(up to six, including the unit)

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

Zone2

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 90

Controlling Zone2

Set MAIN/ZONE2 to “ZONE2”.

Press z (receiver power).

Each time you press the key, Zone2 is enabled or disabled.

When Zone2 is enabled, “ZONE2” lights up in the front

display.

Use the input selection keys to select an input

source.

• Video/audio signals that can be output to Zone2 vary depending on how you

connect the device in Zone2 to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see

“Multi-zone output” (p.147).

• You cannot select USB and network sources exclusively for each zone. For

example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected for the

main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to “SERVER”.

Start playback on the external device or select a

radio station.

Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.

For details on the following operations, see the

corresponding pages.

• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.63)

• Playing back iPod music (p.70)

• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device

(p.73)

• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

(p.76)

• Listening to Internet radio (p.80)

• Playing back music with AirPlay (p.83)

• The on-screen operations are not available for Zone2. Use the front display

or web control (p.92) to control Zone2.

• AirPlay is available in Zone2 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing in the

main zone.

Caution

• To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAN

RETURN

ENTE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

R. DE

MAIN/ZONE2

Input selection keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 91

■ Other operations for Zone2

The following functions are also available when Zone2 is enabled.

Adjusting the volume

Press VOLUME or MUTE.

Selecting the input source and settings at once (SCENE)

Press SCENE.

• To register the current settings (input source, volume and tone control) to a scene,

hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front

display.

Setting the sleep timer

Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30

min, off).

Adjusting the high-/low-frequency range of sounds

a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel.

b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”.

c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.

Setting range

-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (2.0 dB increments)

Default

0.0 dB

Adjusting the Zone2 front speaker balance

a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel.

b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Balance”.

c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.

• When “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”, the

following functions are not available.

– Adjusting the volume, high/low-frequency sound and front speaker balance

– Registering the volume and tone control settings to a scene

■ Enjoying the same source in multiple

rooms (party mode)

The party mode allows you to play back in Zone2 the same music

that is being played back in the main zone. During the party mode,

stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this

function when you want to use main zone music as background

music for a house party.

Press PARTY.

Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or

off.

When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the

front display.

• If the party mode does not work on Zone2, set “Party Mode Set” (p.122) in

the “Setup” menu to “Enable” (default).

• If “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”, Zone2

output is available only when an HDMI input is selected in the main zone.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAN

RETURN

ENTE

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

MUSI

HDMI

TUNER

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

SLEEP

VOLUME

MUTE

SCENE

PARTY

PLAYBACK ➤ Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) En 92

You can control the unit with the web control screen displayed in a web browser.

• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router.

• Some security software installed on your PC may block the access of the unit to your PC. In these

cases, configure the security software appropriately.

• To display the web control screen or turn on the unit from the web control when the unit is in standby

mode, set “Network Standby” (p.94) to “On”.

• We recommend using one of the following web browsers.

– Internet Explorer 9.x, 10.x or 11.x

– Safari 6.x

Start the web browser.

Enter the IP address of the unit in the address bar of the web browser.

(Example)

• You can check the IP address of the unit in “Network” (p.127) in the “Information” menu.

• You can bookmark the unit’s IP address in the browser or create a shortcut link (p.94) to access the

web control screen quickly in the future. However, if you are using a DHCP server, the IP address of

the unit may change each time the unit is turned on.

• If you have enabled the MAC address filter (p.119), you need to specify the MAC address of your PC

to allow the PC to access the unit. For information on how to check the MAC address of your PC,

refer to its instruction manual.

• If you are using Windows 8, we recommend you start Internet Explorer in the following way.

– Select “Desktop” in the Start screen and click the Internet Explorer icon at the bottom left of the

screen.

• By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an

iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices. Visit the Yamaha website for details.

Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control)

Web browser

Web control

Router The unit

Web control

PLAYBACK ➤ Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) En 93

■ Top menu screen

1 CONTROL

Moves to the control screen for the selected zone.

2 STATUS

Turns on/off the power for each zone or displays the input source and volume set for each zone.

3 SETTINGS

Moves to the settings screen.

4 PA RT Y M ODE

Turns on/off the party mode (p.91).

5 SYSTEM POWER

Turns on/off the power for all zones.

6 MAIN VOLUME

Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the main zone. You can also select the

increments used for volume adjustment.

7 RELOAD

Reloads the current status of the unit.

■ Control screen

1 PLAY INFO

Selects an input source or controls playback for the selected zone.

2 TOP MENU

Moves to the top menu screen.

3 SCENE

Selects a scene for the selected zone.

4 POWER

Turns on/off the power for the selected zone.

5 VOLUME

Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the selected zone. You can also select the

increments used for volume adjustment.

6 RELOAD

Reloads the current status of the unit.

• Multi-zone volume adjustment is not available when an external amplifier is used.

PLAYBACK ➤ Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) En 94

■ Settings screen

1 Rename

Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.120) or the name of each zone

(p.121). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.

Network

Selects the network connection method (p.119) or configures the network parameters (such as

IP address) (p.119). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.

MAC Filter

Sets the MAC address filter (p.119) to limit access to the unit from the network devices. Click

“APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.

Auto Reload

Enables/disables automatic reloading. When “Auto Reload” is “On” (enabled), the web control

screen reloads the status of the unit every 5 seconds.

Network Standby

Enables/disables the network standby function (p.119).

Backup/Recovery

Creates a backup of the unit’s settings on the PC or restores the settings from the backup.

Firmware Update

Updates the firmware of the unit by using the firmware you have downloaded on the PC.

Follow the on-screen instructions to start the firmware update.

Create Link

Creates a shortcut link to the desired control screen.

Tips

Displays tips for use of the web control.

2 BACK

Moves to the top menu screen.

3 RELOAD

Reloads the current status of the unit.

Note

• If the network settings are changed, you may need to restart the browser or regain access to the unit.

• When using the MAC address filter, make sure you specify the MAC addresses of your network

devices correctly. Otherwise, the unit will be inaccessible from your network devices such as PCs and

other external devices.

• Do not operate the unit during the recovery process, as this may result in the incorrect recovery of the

settings. When the recovery finishes, click “OK” to set the unit to standby mode.

• The backup does not contain user information (such as user account and password) or unit-specific

information (such as MAC address and IP address).

• Some characters entered with a PC may not appear correctly on the unit.

PLAYBACK ➤ Viewing the current status En 95

Switching information on the front display

Press INFO.

Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.

About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for

the displayed item appears.

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed

item can also be applied separately to each input source group.

* The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio

decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears.

Viewing the status information on the TV

Press DISPLAY.

The following information is displayed on the TV.

To close the information display, press DISPLAY.

Viewing the current status

Input source group Item

AV 1–7

V-AUX

AUDIO 1–4

PHONO

DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder

(decoder name*)

TUNER

DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder

(decoder name*)

* (U.S.A. model only)

HD Radio data is also available when the unit is tuned

into an HD Radio station (p.65).

* (U.K. and Europe models only)

Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is

tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (

p.67

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

AudioDecoder

Info

Item name

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

ProLogic

AV1

Information

USB

SERVER

AirPlay

Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album

name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio

Decoder (decoder name*)

* During simple playback of iPod:

DSP Program (sound mode name),

Audio Decoder (decoder name*)

NET RADIO

Song (song title), Album (album name), Station

(station name), DSP Program (sound mode name),

Audio Decoder (decoder name*)

Input source group Item

Input source/

Party mode

status

Audio format/

Decoder

Compressed Music Enhancer status

CINEMA DSP status

Sound

mode

Volume/

YPAO

Volume

status

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAN

RETURN

ENTE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

INFO

DISPLAY

PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 96

You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This

menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily

configure settings during playback.

Press OPTION.

Front display

TV screen

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Option menu items

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.

• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.

• Default settings are underlined.

Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

ToneControl

Option

Item Function Page

Tone Control

(Tone Control)

Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency

range of sounds.

YPAO Volume

(YPAO Volume)

YPAO Volume

(YPAO Vol.)

Enables/disables YPAO Volume. 97

Adaptive DRC

(A.DRC)

Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to

minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume

is adjusted.

Dialogue

(Dialog)

Dialogue Level

(Dialog Lvl)

Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. 98

Dialogue Lift

(Dialog Lift)

Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. 98

Subwoofer/Bass

(Subwoofer/Bass)

Subwoofer Trim

(SW.Trim)

Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. 98

Extra Bass

(Extra Bass)

Enables/disables Extra Bass. 98

Enhancer

(Enhancer)

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 98

Video Processing

(Video Process.)

Enables/disables the video signal processing

settings configured in the “Setup” menu.

Input Settings

(Input Settings)

Input Trim

(In.Trim)

Corrects volume differences between input sources. 99

Audio Select

(A.Sel)

Selects the audio input jack to use when more than

one audio connection is made for one input source.

Video Out

(V.Out)

Selects a video to be output with the audio input

source.

Audio Mode

(Audio Mode)

(U.S.A. model only)

Switches between stereo and monaural for FM/AM

radio reception.

PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 97

■ Tone Control (Tone Control)

Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds.

Choices

Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)

Setting range

-6.0 dB to Bypass

(Bypass) to +6.0 dB, *0.5 dB increments

• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.

• You can also adjust the “Tone Control” setting with the front panel controls by pressing TONE/BALANCE

repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”, and PROGRAM to make an adjustment.

■ YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume)

Enables/disables YPAO Volume or Adaptive DRC.

Enables/disables YPAO Volume. When YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and

low-frequency levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that

you can enjoy natural sounds even at low volume.

Settings

• YPAO Volume works effectively after the measurement results of “Auto Setup” have been already

saved (p.38).

• We recommend enabling both YPAO Volume and Adaptive DRC when you are listening at lower

volumes or at night.

Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically

adjusted when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for

listening to playback at a low volume at night.

Settings

If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide

at a high volume.

FM Mode

(FM Mode)

(Except for U.S.A. model)

Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio

reception.

Traffic Program

(TrafficProgram)

(U.K. and Europe models only)

Automatically searches for a traffic information

station.

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.72),

USB storage device (p.75), or media server (p.79).

—

Repeat

(Repeat)

Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.72),

USB storage device (p.75), or media server (p.79).

—

Item Function Page

YPAO Volume (YPAO Vol.)

Off (Off) Disables YPAO Volume.

On (On) Enables YPAO Volume.

Adaptive DRC (A.DRC)

Off (Off) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.

On (On)

Automatically adjusts the dynamic range when YPAO Volume is

enabled.

Volume: low Volume: high

Input level Input level

Off

Output level

PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 98

■ Dialogue (Dialog)

Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds.

Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard

clearly, you can turn up its volume by increasing this setting.

Setting range

to 3

Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is

coming from below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing

this setting.

• This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met.

– One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) is selected when front

presence speakers are used.

– Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.58) is working.

(You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.)

Setting range

to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position)

■ Subwoofer/Bass (Subwoofer/Bass)

Adjust the subwoofer volume or bass sound.

Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.

Setting range

-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB

to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy

enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the

presence or absence of the subwoofer.

Settings

■ Enhancer (Enhancer)

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.62).

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

• You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer

(p.62).

Settings

Default

TUNER, USB, (network sources): On (On)

Others: Off (Off)

• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz.

Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl)

Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift)

Ideal position

Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)

Extra Bass (Extra Bass)

Off (Off) Disables Extra Bass.

On (On) Enables Extra Bass.

Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.

On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.

PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 99

■ Video Processing (Video Process.)

Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio) settings

configured in “Processing” (p.116) in the “Setup” menu.

Settings

■ Input Settings (Input Settings)

Configures the input settings.

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume

differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.

Setting range

-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB

to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made

for one input source.

Settings

Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.

Settings

Default

USB: V-AUX (V-AUX)

Others: Off (Off)

■ Audio Mode (Audio Mode)

(U.S.A. model only)

Switches between stereo and monaural for FM/AM radio reception.

• This setting is applied separately to each band (FM/AM).

Settings

• HD Radio programs are not available when the unit is in the monaural reception mode.

■ FM Mode (FM Mode)

(Except for U.S.A. model)

Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception.

Settings

Direct

(Direct) Disables the video signal processing.

Processing

(Processing)

Enables the video signal processing.

Input Trim (In.Trim)

Audio Select (A.Sel)

Auto (Auto)

Automatically selects the audio input jack in the following priority order.

1. HDMI input

2. Digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL)

3. Analog input (AUDIO)

HDMI (HDMI)

Always selects HDMI input. No sounds are produced when no signals

are input through the HDMI jack.

Coax/Opt

(Coax/Opt)

Always selects digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL). No sounds are

produced when no signals are input through the COAXIAL or

OPTICAL jack.

Analog (Analog)

Always selects analog input (AUDIO). No sounds are produced when

no signals are input through the AUDIO jacks.

Video Out (V.Out)

Off (Off) Does not output video.

AV 1–7 (AV1–7),

V-AUX (V-AUX)

Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.

Auto

(Auto)

Receives the selected band (FM or AM) in stereo sounds when the

signal reception is good and in monaural sounds when it is not good.

Mono (Mono) Receives the selected band (FM or AM) in monaural sounds.

Stereo

(Stereo) Receives FM radio in stereo sounds.

Mono (Mono) Receives FM radio in monaural sounds.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring input sources (Input menu) En 100

CONFIGURATIONS

You can change the input source settings using the TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured

and press the cursor key (q).

The input source of the unit also changes.

• You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Input menu items

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.

• Default settings are underlined.

Configuring input sources (Input menu)

Item Function Page

Rename/Icon Select Changes the input source name and icon. 101

Decoder Mode Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS. 101

Volume Interlock

Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via

AirPlay.

101

DMC Control

Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media

Controller (DMC) to control playback.

101

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring input sources (Input menu) En 101

■ Rename/Icon Select

Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.

Input sources

AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, USB, MULTI CH

■ Setup procedure

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a template and press the cursor key (w).

• You cannot change the template or icon for “USB” when an iPod is connected.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Decoder Mode

Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”.

For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder

Mode” to “DTS”.

Input sources

AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned)

Settings

■ Volume Interlock

Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.

Input sources

AirPlay

Settings

■ DMC Control

Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control

playback.

Input source

SERVER

Settings

• A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network.

When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media

Player 12) on the same network.

Auto Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal.

DTS Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.)

Off Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod.

Limited

Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range

(-80 dB to 0 dB and mute).

Full

Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to

+16.5 dB and mute).

Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback.

Enable

Allows DMCs to control playback.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) En 102

You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.55) using the TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and

press the cursor key (q).

• You can still switch the scene by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Scene menu items

■ Save

Registers the unit’s current settings (such as input source and sound program) in the

selected scene.

• If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device

assigned to the corresponding SCENE key (p.56).

Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)

Item Function Page

Save Registers the current settings in the selected scene. 102

Load

Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can

also configure the SCENE link playback setting, select items

to be included as the scene assignments, or view the settings

currently assigned to the selected scene.

103

Rename/Icon Select Changes the scene name and icon. 104

Reset Restores the default settings for the selected scene. 104

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) En 103

■ Load

Loads the settings registered for the selected scene.

Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene

assignments.

Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected

to the unit via HDMI. (SCENE link playback)

Settings

Default

SCENE1 (BD/DVD), SCENE2 (TV): HDMI Control

SCENE3 (NET), SCENE4 (RADIO), SCENE5–12: Off

• To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set

“HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.147).

Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. You can also view the

settings currently assigned to the selected scene.

To include items as the scene assignments, use the cursor keys to select an item

and press ENTER to check the box (or uncheck the box to exclude).

For example, if you often adjust the volume while watching TV but listen to radio

with low volume at night, exclude “Volume” from the assignments for SCENE2 (TV)

and include “Volume” in the assignments for SCENE4 (RADIO).

Choices

Default

Input, HDMI Output, Mode: selected

Sound, Surround, Video, Volume, Lipsync, Speaker Setup: not selected

Device Control

Off Disables the SCENE link playback function.

HDMI Control

Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this

if an HDMI Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is

connected to the unit via HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports

HDMI Control.

Detail

Input Input (p.54), Audio Select (p.99)

HDMI Output HDMI Output (p.54)

Mode Sound Program (p.57), Pure Direct Mode (p.115), Enhancer (p.62)

Sound

Tone Control (p.97), YPAO Volume (p.97), Adaptive DRC (p.97),

Extra Bass (p.98)

Surround

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (p.115), Dialogue Lift (p.98), Dialogue Level

(p.98), Subwoofer Trim (p.98), Extended Surround (p.116)

Video Video Mode (p.116)

Volume Master Volume (p.54)

Lipsync Lipsync (p.114), Delay (p.115)

Speaker Setup Setting Pattern (p.111), PEQ Select (p.113)

Check or uncheck

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 104

■ Rename/Icon Select

Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.

■ Setup procedure

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the

entry.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Reset

Restores the default settings (p.55) for the selected scene.

You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the

TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be

configured and press the cursor key (q).

• You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.

Configuring sound programs/surround

decoders (Sound Program menu)

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 105

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Sound Program menu items

• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program or surround decoder.

• Default settings are underlined.

■ Settings for sound programs

Item Function Settings

Decode Type

Selects a surround decoder to be used

in combination with the selected sound

program.

bPro Logic*, bPLIIx Movie

(bPLII Movie), bPLIIx

Music* (bPLII Music*),

bPLIIx Game* (bPLII

Game*), Neo:6 Cinema,

Neo:6 Music*

(* Available only when

“SURROUND DECODER” is

selected)

DSP Level Adjusts the sound field effect level.

-6

to 0

to +3

Higher to enhance the sound

field effect, and lower to

reduce it.

Initial Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct

sound and presence sound field

generation.

1 ms to 99 ms

Higher to enhance the delay

effect, and lower to reduce it.

Surround Initial Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct

sound and surround sound field

generation.

1ms to 49ms

Higher to enhance the delay

effect, and lower to reduce it.

Surround Back Initial

Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct

sound and surround back sound field

generation.

Room Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of the

presence sound field.

0.1 to 2.0

Higher to enhance the

broadening effect, and lower

to reduce it.

Surround Room Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of the

surround sound field.

Surround Back Room

Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of the

surround back sound field.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 106

The following items are available when you select “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo”.

• Available items in “7ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used.

Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the presence sound

field.

0 to 10

Higher to enhance the

reflectivity, and lower to

reduce it.

Surround Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the surround sound

field.

Surround Back

Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the surround back

sound field.

Reverb Time

Adjust the decay time of the rear

reverberant sound.

1.0 s to 5.0 s

Higher to enrich the

reverberant sound and lower

to have clear sound.

Reverb Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct

sound and reverberant sound

generation.

0 ms to 250 ms

Higher to enhance the delay

effect, and lower to reduce it.

Reverb Level

Adjusts the volume of the reverberant

sound.

0% to 100%

Higher to strengthen the

reverberant sound, and lower

to weaken it.

Item Function Settings

Sound program

Item Function Settings

2ch Stereo Direct

Selects whether to

automatically bypass the

DSP circuit when an

analog audio source is

played back.

Auto

, Off

7ch Stereo

Level Adjusts the entire volume. -5 to 0

to +5

Front / Rear Balance

Adjusts the front and rear

volume balance.

-5 to 0

to +5

Higher to enhance the front

side, and lower to enhance

the rear side.

Left / Right Balance

Adjusts the left and right

volume balance.

-5 to 0

to +5

Higher to enhance the right

side, and lower to enhance

the left side.

Height Balance

Adjust the height volume

balance using the front

presence speakers.

0 to 5

to 10

Higher to enhance the

upside, and lower to

enhance the downside. (The

front presence speakers do

not produce sounds when

“Height Balance” is set to

“0”.)

Monaural Mix

Enables/disables

monaural sound output.

Off

, On

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 107

■ Settings for decoders

The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “SURROUND

DECODER” to “bPLIIx Music” (bPLII Music) or “Neo:6 Music”.

Decode Type Item Function Settings

bPLIIx Music

(bPLII Music)

Panorama

Adjusts the broadening

effect of the front sound

field.

Off

, On

Select “On” to wrap front left/right

channel sounds around the field

and generate a spacious sound

field in combination with the

surround sound field.

Center Width

Adjusts the broadening

effect of the center

sound field.

0 to 3

to 7

Higher to enhance the broadening

effect, and lower to reduce it

(closer to center).

Dimension

Adjusts the difference in

level between the front

and surround sound

fields.

-3 to 0

to +3

Higher to strengthen the front

sound field and lower to strengthen

the surround sound field.

Neo:6 Music Center Image

Adjusts the center

orientation level

(broadening effect) of

the front sound field.

0.0 to 0.3

to 1.0

Higher to strengthen the center

orientation level (less broadening

effect) and lower to weaken (more

broadening effect).

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 108

You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 109

Setup menu items

Menu Item Function Page

Speaker

Auto Setup Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO). 38

Manual Setup

Setting Pattern Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them. 111

Setting Data Copy Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction. 111

Power Amp Assign Selects a speaker system. 111

Configuration

Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 112

Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 112

Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 112

Surround Back Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size. 112

Front Presence Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected. 112

Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase. 113

Layout Selects a surround speaker layout when surround speakers are used. 113

Bass Cross Over Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component that can be output from speakers whose size is set to “Small”. 113

Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 113

Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 113

Parametric EQ Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 113

Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. 114

Sound

Lipsync

Delay Enable Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. 114

Auto/Manual Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 114

Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 115

Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 115

Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 115

Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 115

Pure Direct Mode Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode. 115

Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level. 115

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. 115

Extended Surround Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers are used. 116

Video Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio). 116

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 110

HDMI

HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input). 117

Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 118

Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 118

Network

Network Connection Selects the network connection method. 119

IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 119

Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 119

MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 119

Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 120

Multi Zone

Main Zone Set Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 121

Zone2 Set

Vol ume Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output. 121

Max Volume Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness in the second zone. 121

Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. 121

Mono Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output. 122

Zone Scene Rename Changes the scene names (for Zone2) displayed on the front display. 122

Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 122

Monitor Out Assign Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks are used. 122

HDMI OUT2 Assign Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used. 122

Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode. 122

Function

Input Assignment Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source. 123

Display Set

Dimmer (Front Display) Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 123

Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated. 123

Wallpaper Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. 123

Trigger Output1

Trigger Output2

Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. 124

Target Zone Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. 124

DC OUT Power Mode Selects how to supply power through the DC OUT jack. 124

Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 125

ECO

Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 125

ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). 126

Language Select an on-screen menu language. 126

Menu Item Function Page

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 111

Speaker (Manual Setup)

Configures the speaker settings manually.

• Some speaker settings are not available depending on the selected “Power Amp Assign” setting.

• Default settings are underlined.

■ Setting Pattern

Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.

When you configure the following speaker settings, the settings will be memorized in

the selected pattern.

• Measurement results (Auto Setup)

• Power Amp Assign

• Configuration

• Distance

• Level

• Parametric EQ

Settings

Pattern1

, Pattern2

• The setting pattern currently selected is shown at the top of the “Manual Setup” screen.

• This function is useful when you want to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your

listening environment. For example, if you want to switch the settings when curtains are open or closed,

you can save the settings suited for each condition and switch between them.

■ Setting Data Copy

Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.

Choices

■ Power Amp Assign

Selects a speaker system.

The unit has 7 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 9 speakers and up to 2

subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to create the favorite acoustic space in your room.

You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power

amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system.

Settings

■ Configuration

Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.

• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm

(6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”).

Pattern1 > 2 Copies the “Pattern1” parameters to “Pattern2”.

Pattern2 > 1 Copies the “Pattern2” parameters to “Pattern1”.

Basic

Select this option when you use the basic speaker configuration (up to

7-channel plus front presence speakers) (p.16).

7ch +1ZONE

Select this option when you use 7-channel speakers in the main zone

and Zone2 speakers (p.22).

5ch BI-AMP

Select this option when you use 5-channel speakers (including

bi-amp front speakers) (p.21).

5ch BI-AMP +SB

Select this option when you use 5-channel speakers (including

bi-amp front speakers) plus surround back channel expansion using

an external amplifier (p.22).

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 112

Selects the size of the front speakers.

Settings

• “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”.

Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.

Settings

Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes.

Settings

Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes.

Settings

• This setting is not available when “Surround" is set to "None", or when “Layout (Surround)" is set to

"Front".

Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected.

Settings

Front

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency

components.

Small

Select this option for small speakers.

The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components

(configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).

Center

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency

components.

Small

Select this option for small speakers.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel

low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).

None

Select this option when no center speaker is connected.

The front speakers will produce center channel audio.

Surround

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel

frequency components.

Small

Select this option for small speakers.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel

low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).

None

Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.

The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual

CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program.

Surround Back

Large x1

Select this option when one large speaker is connected.

The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back

channel frequency components.

Large x2

Select this option when two large speakers are connected.

The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back

channel frequency components.

Small x1

Select this option when one small speaker is connected.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel

low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).

Small x2

Select this option when two small speakers are connected.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel

low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).

None

Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.

The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio.

Front Presence

Use Select this option when front presence speakers are connected.

None Select this option when no front presence speakers are connected.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 113

Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase.

Settings

• When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase.

Selects a surround speaker layout when surround speakers are used.

Choices

Surround

Settings

• This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”.

Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency components that can be output from a

speaker whose size is set to “Small”. A frequency sound lower than the specified

value will be produced from the subwoofer or front speakers.

Settings

40 Hz, 60 Hz, 80

Hz, 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz

• If the volume and crossover frequency are adjustable on your subwoofer, set the volume to half and

crossover frequency to maximum.

■ Distance

Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the

speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance

from “Meter” or “Feet”.

Choices

Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,

Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer

Setting range

0.30 m to 3.00

m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 10.0 ft to 80.0 ft), *0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments

■ Level

Adjusts the volume of each speaker.

Choices

Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,

Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer

Setting range

-10.0 dB to 0.0

dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

■ Parametric EQ

Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.

Settings

• “YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto

Setup” have already been saved (p.38). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results.

■ Manual equalizer adjustment

Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER.

Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen.

Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER.

Subwoofer

Use

Normal

Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase not

reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect)

channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels.

Reverse

Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase reversed).

The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio

and low-frequency components from other channels.

None

Select this option when no subwoofer is connected. The front

speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and

low-frequency components from other channels.

Layout

Rear

Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the rear side

of the room.

Front

Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the front

side of the room. Virtual CINEMA FRONT (p.60) works in this case.

Bass Cross Over

Manual

Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.

For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.

YPAO:Flat Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics.

YPAO:Front

Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as

the front speakers.

YPAO:Natural Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound.

Through Does not use the equalizer.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 114

• To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”.

• To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.38) to the “Manual” fields for

fine adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands

and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.

Setting range

Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB

To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER

repeatedly to select an item.

Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected

band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.

Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and

the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.

Setting range

Center frequency: 31.3 Hz to 16.0 kHz

Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Test Tone

Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker

balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.

Settings

Sound

Configures the audio output settings.

■ Lipsync

Adjusts the delay between video and audio by holding up the audio output.

Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.

Choices

AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4

Settings

Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.

Setting range

• Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on

the TV connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”.

Off Does not output test tones.

Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance

or equalizer.

Delay Enable

Disable Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.

Enable

Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.

Auto/Manual Select

Auto

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when

a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the

unit via HDMI.

If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in

“Adjustment”.

Manual

Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video

and audio output manually.

Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 115

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual

Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when

“Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”.

Setting range

ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)

• “Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment and fine adjustment.

■ Dynamic Range

Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and

DTS signals) playback.

Settings

■ Max Volume

Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.

Setting range

-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5

■ Initial Volume

Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.

Settings

■ Pure Direct Mode

Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode (p.62).

Settings

■ Adaptive DSP Level

Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.

Settings

■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode

Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D (p.58). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP

3D functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo).

Settings

Adjustment

Maximum Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.

Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.

Minimum/Auto

Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low

volumes.

When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is

automatically adjusted based on the input signal information.

Off

Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered

standby mode.

Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB

increments).

(This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max

Volume”.)

Auto

Automatically outputs video signals when any videos are input from

the selected input source or an input source that can be operated with

the on-screen display is selected. When no video signals are input,

the wall paper is displayed.

Video Off Does not output video signals including the wall paper.

Off Does not adjust the effect level automatically.

Adjusts the effect level automatically according to the YPAO

measurement results and the volume level.

Off Disables CINEMA DSP 3D.

Enables CINEMA DSP 3D.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 116

■ Extended Surround

Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers

are used.

Settings

• Some early Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS-ES sources do not contain a flag for reproducing surround

back channel. We recommend you set “Extended Surround” to “bPLIIx Movie” or “EX/ES” when playing

back those sources.

Video

Configures the video output settings.

■ Video Mode

Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio).

Settings

• When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to

reduce video output delay.

• When “Video Mode” is set to “Processing” and the resolution is being converted, short messages are not

displayed on the TV screen.

Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to

“Processing”.

Settings

• If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MONITOR CHECK” (p.130) in

the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be

displayed on your TV normally.)

Auto

Automatically selects the most suitable decoder if signals that contain

surround back channel signals are input, and reproduces the signals

in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. If two surround back speakers are connected,

the unit reproduces the 5.1-channel signals in 7.1-channel.

bPLIIx Movie

Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic

IIx Movie decoder. This setting is available only when two surround

back speakers are connected.

bPLIIx Music

Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro

Logic IIx Music decoder. This setting is available only when one or two

surround back speakers are connected.

EX/ES

Automatically selects the Dolby EX or DTS-ES decoder, and

reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel.

Off

Always reproduces signals in their original channels. (Even when

DTS-ES or Dolby Digital Surround EX signal is input, the unit

reproduces the signal in 5.1-channel.)

Direct Disables the video signal processing.

Processing

Enables the video signal processing.

Select a resolution and an aspect ratio in “Resolution” and “Aspect”.

Resolution

Through Does not convert the resolution.

Auto

Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution.

480p/576p, 720p,

1080i, 1080p, 4K

Output video signals with a selected resolution.

(Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.)

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 117

Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to

“Processing”.

Settings

• This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i,

1080p, or 2160p (4K) signals.

HDMI

Configures the HDMI settings.

■ HDMI Control

Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.147).

Settings

• To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.147) after connecting HDMI

Control-compatible devices.

Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI

Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio

when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner.

Settings

AUDIO 1–4

Default

AUDIO 1

• When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for

connecting an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.

Aspect

Through Does not convert the aspect ratio.

16:9 Normal

Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side

of the screen.

Off Disables HDMI Control.

Enables HDMI Control.

Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby

Sync”.

TV Audio Input

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 118

Enables/disables ARC (p.149) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

Settings

• You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers

connected to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the

unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use the TV’s speakers.

Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the

unit when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

Settings

■ Audio Output

Selects a device to output audio.

• The “Amp” and “HDMI OUT1” settings are available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.

• The “HDMI OUT2” setting is available only when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.122) is set to “Main”.

Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones connected

to the unit.

Settings

Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack or

HDMI OUT 2 jack.

Settings

• The HDMI OUT 1–2 jacks output 2-channel audio signals when the unit is turned on.

■ Standby Through

Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the

unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On”, you can use the input selection

keys (AV 1–7 and V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby

mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks).

Settings

• This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.

ARC

Off Disables ARC.

Enables ARC.

Standby Sync

Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.

On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.

Auto

Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the

unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.

Amp

Off Disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones.

Enables the audio output from the speakers and headphones.

HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2

Off Disables the audio output from the TV.

On Enables the audio output from the TV.

Off

Does not output videos/audio to the TV.

Outputs videos/audio to the TV.

(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 119

Network

Configures the network settings.

■ Network Connection

Selects the network connection method.

Settings

■ IP Address

Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).

Select whether to use a DHCP server.

Settings

■ Manual network settings

Set “DHCP” to “Off”.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys

(q/w) to select a value.

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.

To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4.

To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Network Standby

Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network

standby).

Settings

■ MAC Address Filter

Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.

Enables/disables the MAC address filter.

Settings

• AirPlay (p.83) and DMC (p.101) operations are not subject to the MAC address filter.

Wired

Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network with

a commercially-available network cable (p.34)

Wireless (Wi-Fi)

Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network via

the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, see

“Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.47).

Wireless Direct

Select this option when you want to connect a mobile device to the

unit directly. For details on settings, see “Connecting a mobile device

to the unit directly (Wireless Direct)” (p.52).

DHCP

Off

Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters

manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”.

Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network

parameters (such as IP address).

IP Address Specifies an IP address.

Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask.

Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.

DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.

DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.

Off

Disables the network standby function.

Enables the network standby function.

(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)

Filter

Off Disables the MAC address filter.

Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the

MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access

to the unit.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 120

Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be

permitted access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.

■ Procedure

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1–5” or “MAC Address

6–10” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press

ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys

(q/w) to select a value.

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.

To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Network Name

Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network

devices.

■ Procedure

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the

entry.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

MAC Address 1–10

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 121

Multi Zone

Configures the multi zone settings.

■ Main Zone Set

Configures the main zone setting.

Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV

screen.

■ Procedure

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the

entry.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Zone2 Set

Configures the Zone2 settings.

Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.

If you have connected an external amplifier with volume control to the unit, disable

volume adjustments for Zone2.

Settings

• This setting is not available when “Power Amp Assign” (p.111) is set to “7ch +1ZONE”.

Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.

Setting range

-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5

• This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.

Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.

Settings

• This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.

Zone Rename

Volume

Fixed Disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.

Variable

Enables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.

Max Volume

Initial Volume

Off

Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby

mode.

Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB

increments).

(This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max Volume”.)

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 122

Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output.

Settings

Changes the scene names (for Zone2) displayed on the front display.

■ Procedure

Use the cursor keys to select a scene to be renamed and press ENTER.

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the

entry.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the front display or TV screen.

You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main

Zone Set” (p.121).

■ Monitor Out Assign

Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO and

VIDEO) jacks are used.

Settings

Main

, Zone2

• To watch videos played back on a video device on the Zone2 video monitor, you need to connect the video

monitor to the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from

the DVD player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

with a component video cable.

■ HDMI OUT2 Assign

Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.

Settings

Main

, Zone2

• For details on video/audio signals that can be output to Zone2, see “Multi-zone output” (p.147).

■ Party Mode Set

Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.91).

Choice

Target: Zone2

Settings

Mono

Off Produces stereo sounds in Zone2.

On Produces monaural sounds in Zone2.

Zone Scene Rename

Zone Rename

Disable Disables switching to the party mode.

Enable

Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party

mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 123

Function

Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use.

■ Input Assignment

Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input

source.

■ Procedure

Example: assigning the OPTICAL (e) jack to the input source “AV 2”

Use the cursor keys to select the cell at the intersection of “AV 2” and “Optical”,

and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select “e” and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

• You cannot assign both COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to the same input source.

■ Display Set

Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display.

Adjusts the brightness of the front display.

Setting range

-4 to 0

(higher to brighten)

• The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.126) is set to “On”.

Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is

operated (such as input selection and volume adjustment).

Settings

Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.

Settings

Dimmer (Front Display)

Short Message

On Displays short messages on the TV screen.

Off Does not display short messages on the TV screen.

Wallpaper

Picture1, Picture2,

Picture3

Displays the selected image on the TV screen when there is no video

signal.

Gray

Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video

signal.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 124

■ Trigger Output1, Trigger Output2

Sets the TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks to function in sync with the power status of each zone

or input switching.

Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.

Settings

Source

Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input,

switching when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”.

Choices

AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), USB, MULTI CH

Settings

Manual

Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger

Mode” is set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function

of the external device connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.

Choices

Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.

Settings

■ DC OUT

Configures the DC OUT jack setting.

Selects how to supply power to the Yamaha AV accessory connected to the DC

OUT jack.

Settings

Trigger Mode

Power

The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the

zone specified with “Target Zone”.

Source

The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in

the zone specified with “Target Zone”.

An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in

“Source.”

Manual

Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal

transmission with “Manual”.

Low

Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input

source specified in this option.

High

Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source

specified in this option.

Low Stops the electronic signal transmission.

High

Transmits the electronic signal.

Target Zone

Main

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the power status of the main zone.

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone.

Zone2

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the power status of Zone2.

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the input switching in Zone2.

All

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the power status of the main zone or Zone2.

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone or Zone2.

Power Mode

Continuous

Supplies power through the DC OUT jack continuously regardless of

the power state (on/standby) of the unit.

Main Zone Power

Sync.

Supplies power through the DC OUT jack only when the main zone is

turned on.

(This setting may not work properly on some accessories.)

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 125

■ Memory Guard

Prevents accidental changes to the settings.

Settings

• When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.

ECO

Configures the power supply settings.

■ Auto Power Standby

Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit or if

no input signals are detected for the specified time, the unit will automatically go into

standby mode.

Settings

Default

U.K. and Europe models: 20 Minutes

Other models: Off

• Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the

front display.

Off Does not protect the settings.

On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.

Icon

Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.

20 Minutes

Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit

and no input signals are detected (or the unit is muted) for 20 minutes.

2 Hours, 4 Hours,

8 Hours, 12 Hours

Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for

the specified time. For example, when “2 Hours” is selected, the unit

will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) En 126

■ ECO Mode

Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode.

When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption.

Settings

• The new setting will take effect after the unit is restarted.

• When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark.

• If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.

Language

Select an on-screen menu language.

Settings

• The information on the front display is provided in English only.

You can view information about the unit using the TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Off Disables the eco mode.

On Enables the eco mode.

English

Japanese

French

German

Spanish

Russian

Italian

Chinese

Français

Deutsch

Español

Italiano

Viewing information about the unit

(Information menu)

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) En 127

Types of information

■ Audio Signal

Displays information about the current audio signal.

• Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the

specifications and settings of the playback device.

■ Video Signal

Displays information about the current video signal.

■ HDMI Monitor

Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”.

■ Network

Displays the network information on the unit.

(When using wired or wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)

(When using Wireless Direct)

Input

Format Audio format of the input signal

Channel

The number of source channels in the input signal

(front/surround/LFE)

For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total

(3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE).

Sampling The number of samples per second of the input digital signal

Bitrate The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal

Dialogue The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal

Output The speaker terminals from which signals are output

HDMI Signal Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output

HDMI Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI)

Analog Resolution

Resolutions of input signal (analog) and signal output at the MONITOR OUT

jacks (analog)

Interface TV interface

Video Resolution Resolutions supported by the TV

IP Address IP address

Subnet Mask Subnet mask

Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway

DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server

DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server

MAC Address MAC address

Network Name Network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.120)

Wired/Wireless The status of the wired or wireless connection

SSID

(When using wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)

The SSID of the wireless network

SSID The SSID of the wireless network

Security Security method

Security Key Security key

IP Address IP address

Subnet Mask Subnet mask

MAC Address MAC address

Network Connection “Wireless Direct” indication

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 128

■ System

Displays the system information on the unit.

• If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of

the “Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You

can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating

the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.132).

■ Multi Zone

Displays information about Zone2.

Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.

Set the unit to standby mode.

While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE

Press PROGRAM to select an item.

Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.

Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on

again.

The new settings take effect.

Remote ID The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.129)

TV Format The unit’s video signal type (p.130)

Speaker Impedance The speaker impedance setting of the unit (p.129)

Tuner Freq. Step

(Asia and General models only)

The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit (p.130)

System ID System ID number

Firmware Version The version of firmware installed on the unit

Input The input source selected for Zone2

Volume The volume for Zone2

Configuring the system settings

(ADVANCED SETUP menu)

MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT

PROGRAM

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 129

ADVANCED SETUP menu items

• Default settings are underlined.

Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.)

Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the

speakers connected.

Settings

Turning on/off the remote control sensor

(REMOTE SENSOR)

Turn on/off the remote control sensor on the main unit. While the remote control sensor

is turned off, you cannot control the unit from the remote control.

Settings

Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP)

Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default:

ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a

unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.

Settings

ID1

, ID2

■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control

To select ID1, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE (BD/DVD) together for

3 seconds.

To select ID2, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE (TV) together for 3

seconds.

Item Function Page

SPEAKER IMP. Changes the speaker impedance setting. 129

REMOTE SENSOR Turns on/off of the remote control sensor on the main unit. 129

REMOTE CON AMP Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 129

TUNER FRQ STEP

(Asia and General models only)

Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting.

130

TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type. 130

MONITOR CHECK Removes the limitation on HDMI video output. 130

RECOV./BACKUP

Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings

from the backup.

131

INITIALIZE Restores the default settings. 131

FIRM UPDATE Updates the firmware. 131

VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 131

6  MIN

Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You

can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

 MIN

Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the

unit.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

8MIN

SPEAKERIMP.

ON Turns on the remote control sensor.

OFF Turns off the remote control sensor.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

ON

REMOTESENSOR

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

ID1

REMOTECONAMP

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 130

Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting

(TUNER FRQ STEP)

(Asia and General models only)

Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or

region.

Settings

Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)

Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV.

Settings

NTSC, PAL

Default

U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models: NTSC

Other models: PAL

Removing the limitation on HDMI video output

(MONITOR CHECK)

The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI

OUT jack.

Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution”

(p.116) when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a

different resolution than the detected resolution.

Settings

• Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV

after “MONITOR CHECK” has been set to “SKIP”.

FM100/AM10

Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz

steps and AM by 10-kHz steps.

FM50/AM9

Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps

and AM by 9-kHz steps.

OUT

ZONE

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

FM50/AM9

TUNERFRQSTEP

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

NTSC

TVFORMAT

YES

Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a

resolution supported by the TV only.)

SKIP

Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a

specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.)

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

YES

MONITORCHECK

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 131

Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP)

Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup.

■ Backup/recovery procedure

Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “BACKUP” or “RECOVERY” and press INFO

to start the process.

Choices

Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE)

Restores the default settings for the unit.

Choices

Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE)

New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be

released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. If the unit

is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For

details, refer to the information supplied with updates.

■ Firmware update procedure

Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure

you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.

Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to

start firmware update.

Choices

• If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after

ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in

“Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.132).

Checking the firmware version (VERSION)

Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.

• You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.128) in the “Information” menu.

• It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed.

BACKUP Creates backup of the settings of the unit in the internal memory.

RECOVERY

Recovers the settings of the unit from the backup (available only when

backup has been created).

Note

• Do not turn off the unit during the recovery process. Otherwise, the settings may not be restored

correctly.

• The backup does not contain user information (such as user accounts and passwords).

VIDEO Restores the default settings for video configurations.

ALL Restores the default settings for the unit.

CANCEL Does not perform an initialization.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

BACKUP

RECOV./BACKUP

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

CANCEL

INITIALIZE

USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device.

NETWORK Update the firmware via the network.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

USB

FIRMUPDATE

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

x.xx

VERSION

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Updating the unit’s firmware via the network En 132

New firmware that provides additional features or product

improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected

to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and

update it.

• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the

“ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.131).

A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed

after ON SCREEN is pressed.

Read the on-screen description.

To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to

select “START” and press ENTER.

The on-screen display turns off.

If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!”

appears on the front display, press MAIN ZONE z

on the front panel.

The firmware update is complete.

• If you want to update the firmware later, select “CLOSE” in Step 2. “!” (exclamation

mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a

message will be displayed in the “System” screen (p.128). You can update the

unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in the “System” screen.

Updating the unit’s firmware via the network

Note

• Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during

firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more

(depending on your Internet connection speed).

• If the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update may not be

possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case,

update the firmware using the USB memory device (p.131).

• For details on update, visit the Yamaha website.

Information

icon

Message

System Icon

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAN

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUSI

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MULT

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

ENTER

Cursor keys

APPENDIX ➤ Frequently asked questions En 133

APPENDIX

The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound

balance...

If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to

optimize the speaker settings again (p.38). If you want to adjust the speaker settings

manually, use “Manual Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.111).

Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the

volume control...

If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the

volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or

speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum

volume level for the unit in advance (p.115). You can also set the maximum volume for

Zone2 (p.121).

I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning

on the unit...

By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically

applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the

volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.115). You can also set the initial

volume for Zone2 (p.121).

We are bothered by volume differences when switching

between input sources…

You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in

the “Option” menu (p.99).

I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at

all...

To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.147). After

connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit,

enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This

setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your

system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback

devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device.

I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during

operations...

By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated

(such as input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you

when you are watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.123) in the

“Setup” menu to turn off the short messages.

I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...

You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by

utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.125).

The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another

Yamaha product as well as the unit...

When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another

Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens,

remote control (p.129).

I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device

even when the unit is in standby mode...

If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output

videos/audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in

standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu

to “On”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when

this function is enabled.

Frequently asked questions

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 134

Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.

If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized

Yamaha dealer or service center.

First, check the following:

a The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets

securely.

b The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.

c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.

Power, system and remote control

Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Remedy

The power does not turn on.

The protection circuitry has been activated three times

consecutively. When the unit is in this condition, the standby

indicator on the unit blinks if you try to turn on the power.

As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your

nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.

The power does not turn off.

The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric

shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop

in the power supply voltage.

Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to

initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable

from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)

The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.

Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and

speakers (p.19).

The unit enters standby mode automatically.

The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again.

The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used

for the specified time.

To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup”

menu to “Off” (p.125).

The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.129).

The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short

circuit.

Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and

speakers (p.19).

The protection circuitry has been activated because the volume of

the unit is too high.

Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to

“Off” (p.126).

The unit is not reacting.

The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric

shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop

in the power supply voltage.

Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to

initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable

from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 135

The unit cannot be controlled using the remote

control.

The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5).

The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries.

The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or

strong lighting.

Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.

(China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only)

The remote control is set to control external devices.

Press RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key lights up in

orange).

The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not

identical.

Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.129).

The MHL-compatible mobile device cannot be

controlled using the remote control.

The mobile device or its application is not externally controllable. Directly operate the mobile device itself.

Problem Cause Remedy

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 136

Audio

Problem Cause Remedy

No sound.

Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.

Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio

format of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.127).

The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The volume cannot be increased.

The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.115).

A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.

No sound is coming from a specific speaker.

The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.127).

The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the

speaker.

To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.114).

Audio output of the speaker is disabled.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.38) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change

the speaker settings (p.111).

The volume of the speaker is set too low.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.38) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the

speaker volume (p.113).

The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is

defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.

The speaker is malfunctioning.

To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be

malfunctioning.

No sound is coming from the surround back

speaker.

The extended surround is disabled.

Use “Extended Surround” in the “Setup” menu to select a decoder to be used

(p.116).

No sound is coming from the subwoofer.

The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency

signals.

To check if the subwoofer is working properly, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu

(p.114).

Subwoofer output is disabled.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.38) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use”

(p.113).

The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.

The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.

No sound from the playback device (connected to

the unit with HDMI).

The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content

Protection).

Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.

The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from

the SPEAKERS terminals.

In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.118).

The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds

the limit.

Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 137

Video

No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is

used).

The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.

Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the

speakers connected to the unit.

A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with

an HDMI cable.

Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.26).

(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)

The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.

Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack

(p.117).

(If you are trying to use ARC)

ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.

Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.118). Also, enable ARC on the TV.

Only the front speakers work on multichannel

audio.

The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as

PCM) only.

To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.127). If necessary,

change the digital audio output setting on the playback device.

Noise/hum is heard.

The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device.

The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The sound is distorted.

The volume of the unit is too high.

Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to

“Off” (p.126).

A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.

The sound is interrupted.

If the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2, HDMI

audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due

to internal circuitry switching.

For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back

videos/audio” (p.88).

Problem Cause Remedy

No video.

Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.

The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV. Set “MONITOR CHECK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.130).

The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is

defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

No video from the playback device (connected to

the unit with HDMI).

The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.

To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video

Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.127). For information about video signals

supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.149).

The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content

Protection).

Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.

The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over

the limit.

Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.

The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV.

The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI.

You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with

an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.26).

Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 138

FM/AM radio

The video is interrupted.

(If you are using 2 TVs in the main zone)

Another TV is turned off when “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected.

Select “HDMI OUT 1” or “HDMI OUT 2” to output the signals only to the TV you

are using (p.54).

(If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2)

HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone

operations due to internal circuitry switching.

For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back

videos/audio” (p.88).

Problem Cause Remedy

FM radio reception is weak or noisy.

There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.

Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.

(U.S.A. model only)

Set “Audio Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio

reception (p.99).

(Except for U.S.A. model)

Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio

reception (p.99).

Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element

antenna.

AM radio reception is weak or noisy.

The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors,

thermostats, or other electrical equipment.

It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor

AM antenna.

Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.

Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.

Select the station manually (p.63).

Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element

antenna.

The AM radio signal is weak.

Adjust the AM antenna orientation.

Select the station manually (p.63).

Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with

the supplied AM antenna.

AM radio stations cannot be registered as

presets.

Auto Preset has been used.

Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations and HD Radio station (U.S.A.

model only) only. Register AM radio stations manually (p.64).

The unit does not receive HD Radio signals.

(U.S.A. model only)

The unit is in the monaural reception mode. Set “Audio Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Auto” (p.99).

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 139

USB and network

Problem Cause Remedy

The unit does not detect the USB device.

The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.

The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.

Folders and files in the USB device cannot be

viewed.

The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function.

The files in the USB device cannot be played back

continuously.

Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.

If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)

during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files

in the playback folder.

The network feature does not function.

The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained

properly.

Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup”

menu to “On” on the unit (p.119). If you want to configure the network parameters

manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other

network devices in your network (p.119).

The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a

wireless router (access point).

The wireless router (access point) is turned off. Turn on the wireless router.

The unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart. Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other.

There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router

(access point).

Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are

no obstacles between them.

Wireless network is not found.

Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood

might disturb the wireless communication.

Turn off these devices.

Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the

wireless router (access point).

Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point).

The unit does not detect the PC.

The media sharing setting is not correct.

Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music

contents are shared (p.76).

Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access

of the unit to your PC.

Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.

The unit and PC are not in the same network.

Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the

unit and the PC to the same network.

The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.

In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or

specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.119).

The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played

back.

The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.

Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For

information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music

stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.76).

The files in the PC cannot be played back

continuously.

Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.

If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)

during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files

in the playback folder.

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 140

The Internet radio cannot be played.

The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.

There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have

been stopped. Try the station later or select another station.

The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting

silence.

Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try

the station later or select another station.

Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your

network devices (such as the router).

Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be

played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station.

The port number varies depending on the radio station.

The iPod does not recognize the unit when using

AirPlay.

The unit is connected to a multiple SSID router.

Access to the unit might be restricted by the network separation function on the

router. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.

The application for smartphone/tablet “AV

CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit.

The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network.

Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the

unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network.

The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.

In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or

specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the

unit (p.119).

Firmware update via the network is failed. It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.131).

Problem Cause Remedy

APPENDIX ➤ Error indications on the front display En 141

Error indications on the front display

Message Cause Remedy

Access denied Access to the PC is denied.

Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared

(p.76).

Access error

The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

The unit cannot access the iPod. Turn off the iPod and turn it on again.

The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.70).

There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.

Make sure your router and modem are turned on.

Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.34).

Check SP Wires The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly.

Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

MHL Overloaded

An overcurrent is flowing through the MHL-compatible mobile

device.

Turn off the unit and check the connection between the unit and mobile device.

No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.

No device

The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

The unit cannot detect the iPod. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again.

Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.

Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn

it on again.

RemID Mismatch

The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not

identical.

Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.129).

Remote Off

The unit cannot be operated from remote control because the

remote control sensor on the main unit is turned off.

Use the controls on the front panel. To use the remote control, set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the

“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “ON” (p.129).

Unable to play

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the USB device for

some reasons.

Check the song data. If it cannot be played on another device, the song data may be defective.

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some

reason.

Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be

defective.

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some

reason.

Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the

formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.76). If

the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with

heavy traffic.

USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

Version error Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again.

APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 142

Audio information

■ Audio decoding format

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports

5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.

Dolby Digital EX

Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby

Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound.

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports

7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems

that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

Dolby Pro Logic II

Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available:

“Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources.

Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three

modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for

game sources (for 2-channel sources only).

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a

high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to

eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This

technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This

format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital

Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc.

DTS Digital Surround

DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports

5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.

DTS-ES

DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This

decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a

surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a

discrete surround back channel is recorded.

DTS Express

DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher

compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is

developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports

7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the

existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on

BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home

theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to

eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This

technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS Neo:6

DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music

mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete

full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound.

DSD (Direct Stream Digital)

DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super

Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz. The highest

frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology

offers better audio quality than that used for CDs.

FLAC

FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio

formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality.

MP3

One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this

compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data

quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.

MPEG-4 AAC

An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming

services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality

than MP3.

PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)

PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This

technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called

Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs).

Glossary

APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 143

Sampling frequency/Quantization bit

Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal

is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.

• Sampling frequency

Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate.

When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.

• Quantization bit

The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a

numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more

accurate.

WAV

Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by

converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other

compression methods.

WMA (Windows Media Audio)

One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic

technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of

compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.

■ Others

Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)

A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification

connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a

consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference.

LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel

This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This

channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio

effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.

Lip sync

Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an

increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag

between audio and video output.

HDMI and video information

Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and

the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because

each of these signals is independent.

Composite video signal

With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined

and transmitted with a single cable.

Deep Color

Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available

colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems

process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology

allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate

on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors.

HDMI

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video

signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable

without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a

secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at

“http://www.hdmi.org/”.

MHL

MHL (Mobile High-definition Link) is the interface standard for high-speed digital video signal transmission

that is developed for mobile devices. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals

from mobile devices (such as smartphones) using a single cable with any loss. As with HDMI, MHL

complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection).

x.v.Color

“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than

sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with

the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid,

natural images.

APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 144

Network information

SSID

SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point.

Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or connect to the

Internet wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making

connections with network cables by using wireless connection. Only products that complete Wi-Fi Alliance

interoperability tests can carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark.

WPS

WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy

establishment of a wireless home network.

Yamaha technologies

CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is

best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions

(such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are

differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP,

Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own

home.

CINEMA DSP 3D

The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA

DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the

accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room.

Compressed Music Enhancer

The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music

formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound

system.

SILENT CINEMA

Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for

headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound

programs can be enjoyed on headphones.

Virtual CINEMA DSP

Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with

front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic

sound field in a listening room.

Virtual CINEMA FRONT

Virtual CINEMA FRONT allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers

with front surround speakers. Even if the surround speakers placed in the front, the unit creates the realistic

sound field in a listening room.

Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)

Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without

front presence speakers. Even if the front presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D

sound field in your room.

APPENDIX ➤ Supported devices and file formats En 145

■ Supported devices

❑ USB devices

• This unit supports USB mass storage class devices (e.g., flash memories or portable

audio players) using FAT16 or FAT32 format.

• Do not connect devices other than USB mass storage class devices (such as USB

chargers or USB hubs), PCs, card readers, an external HDD, etc.

• USB devices with encryption cannot be used.

• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of

the USB storage device.

❑ iPod

• An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible,

depending on the model or software version of the iPod.

❑ AirPlay

AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X

Mountain Lion, and Mac and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later.

(as of April 2014)

■ File formats

❑ USB

• The unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC,

FLAC and ALAC (Apple Lossless Audio Codec) files (1- or 2-channel audio only).

• The unit is compatible with sampling rate of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC files,

96 kHz for ALAC files, and 48 kHz for other files.

• The unit supports gapless playback of WAV, FLAC and ALAC files.

• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.

❑ PC/NAS

• The unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC,

FLAC and ALAC (Apple Lossless Audio Codec) files (1- or 2-channel audio only).

• The unit is compatible with sampling rate of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC files,

96 kHz for ALAC files, and 48 kHz for other files.

• The unit supports gapless playback of WAV, FLAC and ALAC files.

• To play back FLAC files, you need to install server software that supports sharing of

FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.

• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.

Supported devices and file formats

Made for.

iPod touch (2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th generation)

iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th and 7th generation)

iPhone 5, iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G

iPad (4th generation), iPad mini, iPad (3rd generation), iPad 2, iPad

(as of April 2014)

About HTC Connect

This receiver features “HTC Connect”, a simple way to enjoy all music content from

your HTC Connect certified smartphone.

1. HTC Connect music streaming provided on this product has been developed based on

interoperability testing as defined by the HTC Connect program with the HTC Connect

compatible smartphones.

2. HTC Connect has been tested with MP3, AAC, WMA and WAV encoding formats. Other

formats may not be compatible.

3. High network congestion may interfere with the operation of HTC Connect.

4. Music navigation via the music progress bar is not currently supported with HTC

Connect.

Please check HTC website for up to date information about features, compatible

devices and audio format support: http://www.htc-connect.com/certified-devices

APPENDIX ➤ Supported devices and file formats En 146

Video signal flow

Video signals input from a video device to the unit are

output to a TV as shown below.

■ Video conversion table

• You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.116) in the “Setup” menu.

• The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.

HDMI HDMI

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

VIDEO VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

m: Available

HDMI out COMPONENT VIDEO out

VIDEO

out

Resolution

480i/

576i

480p/

576p

720p 1080i 1080p 4K

480i/

576i

480p/

576p

720p 1080i 1080p

480i/

576i

HDMI in

480i/576i mmmmmm

480p/576p mmmmm

720p mmmm

1080i mmmm

1080p/

50, 60 Hz

mmmm

1080p/24 Hz

4K m

COMPONENT

VIDEO in

480i/576i mmmmmmm

480p/576p mmmmm m

720p mmmm m

1080i mmmm m

1080p m

VIDEO in 480i/576i mmmmmm m

Video device The unit TV

HDMI outHDMI in

COMPONENT

VIDEO in

COMPONENT

VIDEO out

VIDEO outVIDEO in

APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 147

Multi-zone output

■ Audio output

m: Available

*1 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”

*2 Stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input source selected in the main zone is selected

■ Video output

m: Available

*3 Available when “Monitor Out Assign” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”

*4 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”

HDMI Control

HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that

supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as

power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback

devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with

an HDMI cable.

For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.26) and “Connecting video

devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.28).

Operations available from the TV’s remote control

• Standby synchronization

• Volume control including mute

• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner

• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device

• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)

(Example)

Operations available from the unit’s remote control

• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene

selection (p.55)

• Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed)

• Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) using the exter

nal

evice operation keys

Using the unit’s

internal amplifier (

p.23

)

Using an external amplifier (p.87)

Zone2 Out

EXTRA SP jacks ZONE OUT jacks

HDMI OUT 2

(ZONE OUT) jack (*1)

Digital audio (HDMI) m (*2)

Analog audio

(AUDIO)

USB (including iPod) mm

Network sources mm

TUNER mm

Zone2 Out

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks (*3)

HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT)

jack (*4)

COMPONENT VIDEO

VIDEO

HDMI video m

Component video m

Composite video m

Information on HDMI

HDMI Control

Turn off the TV

The unit turns off

(standby)

HDMI Control

Playback device

also turns off

APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 148

(Example)

To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after

connecting the TV and playback devices.

For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.

• This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.

Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.

Configure the settings of the unit.

a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.

b Press ON SCREEN.

c Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.

d Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.

e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.

f Use the cursor keys to select “On”.

g Press ON SCREEN.

Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI

Control-compatible BD/DVD players).

Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and

playback devices.

Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.

Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.

Check the followings.

On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected.

If not, select the input source manually.

On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.

Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning

off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.

• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 3 and plugging in the TV again in

Step 4. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices

exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.

• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on

the TV.

• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works

more effectively.

• We do not assure the operation of all HDMI Control-compatible devices.

HDMI Control

Press SCENE (BD/DVD)

Turns on and displays

video from the playback

device

HDMI Control

Playback starts

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

RETURN

PTI

ON SCREEN

Cursor keys

ENTER

APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 149

Audio Return Channel (ARC)

ARC allows you to input TV audio to the unit with the HDMI cable which transmits video

signal to the TV.

Check the following after the HDMI Control settings.

Select a TV program with the TV remote control.

Check that the input source of the unit will be automatically switched

to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.

If you cannot hear the TV audio, check the following:

– “ARC” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”.

– The HDMI cable is connected to the ARC-compatible HDMI jack (HDMI jack

marked “ARC”) on the TV.

Some HDMI jack on the TV is not compatible with ARC. For details, refer to the

instruction manual for the TV.

• If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use an

audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable) to input TV audio to the unit (p.26).

• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.

• “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the

AUDIO 1 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.117) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input

assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.56), you also need to change the input assignment for

SCENE (TV).

HDMI signal compatibility

Audio signals

Video signals

The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:

• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending

on the type of the DVD player.

• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction

manual for each device.

• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device

outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device).

For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device.

Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example)

2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio

Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit

DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc),

HD DVD

DSD 2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD

Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video

Bitstream

(High definition audio)

Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,

DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD

High Resolution Audio, DTS

Express

BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD

• VGA • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

• 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

• 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• 480p/60 Hz • 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• 576p/50 Hz

APPENDIX ➤ Reference diagram (rear panel) En 150

• The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections.

Reference diagram (rear panel)

(U.S.A. model)

APPENDIX ➤ Trademarks En 151

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro

Logic, Surround EX and the double-D symbol are trademarks of

Dolby Laboratories.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674;

5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195;

7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending.

DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol together are

registered trademarks & DTS-HD Master Audio is a trademark of

DTS, Inc.

“Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that

an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically

to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the

developer to meet Apple performance standards.

Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its

compliance with safety and regulatory standards.

Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad

may affect wireless performance.

iTunes, AirPlay, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, iPod touch, and Safari

are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other

countries.

MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS

and Thomson.

This receiver supports network connections.

HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity

Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the

HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity

Digital Corp.

HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are

trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the

United States and other countries.

MHL and the MHL logo are a trademark, registered trademark or

service mark of MHL, LLC in the United States and/or other countries.

x.v.Color™

“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered

Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.

Windows™

Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the

United States and other countries.

Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player

are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Android™

Android is a trademark of Google Inc.

The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certification mark of the Wi-Fi

Alliance.

The Wi-Fi Protected Setup Identifier Mark is a mark of the Wi-Fi

Alliance.

Ubiquitous WPS2.0

HTC, HTC Connect and the HTC Connect Logo are either registered

trademarks or trademarks of HTC Corporation.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.

Trademarks

APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 152

Input jacks

• Analog Audio

Audio x 10 (AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, V-AUX)

MULTI CH INPUT x 1 (8 ch)

(FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,

SURROUND BACK L/R, SUBWOOFER)

• Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)

Optical x 3 (AV 3–4, AUDIO 1)

Coaxial x 3 (AV 1–2, AUDIO 2)

•Video

Composite x 5 (AV 1–4, V-AUX)

Component x 3 (AV 1–3)

• HDMI Input

HDMI x 8 (AV 1–7, V-AUX*)

* V-AUX: MHL input compatible

•Others

USB x 1 (USB2.0)

NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)

Output jacks

• Analog Audio

- Speaker Out x 9 (7 ch) (FRONT L/R

, CENTER,

SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, EXTRA SP L/R

)

*1 Note: Assignment is possible [ZONE2, F.PRESENCE,

BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)]

- Pre Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,

SURROUND BACK L/R)

- Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1–2, mono)

- Audio x 1 (AV OUT)

- ZONE OUT x 1 (ZONE 2)

• Digital Audio

Optical x 1 (AV OUT)

•Video

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

- Composite x 1

- Component x 1

AV OUT

- Composite x 1

• HDMI Output

HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT 1–2*)

* barter to ZONE OUT (ZONE2)

Other jacks

• YPAO MIC x 1

• REMOTE IN x 1

• REMOTE OUT x 1

• TRIGGER OUT x 2

• RS-232C x 1

• DC OUT x 1

HDMI

• HDMI features: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, ARC

udio Return Channel), 3D, 4K Ultra HD

• Video Format (Repeater Mode)

-VGA

- 480i/60 Hz

- 576i/50 Hz

- 480p/60 Hz

- 576p/50 Hz

- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

- 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

- 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• Audio Format

-Dolby TrueHD

- Dolby Digital Plus

- Dolby Digital

- DTS-HD Master Audio

- DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

- DTS Express

-DTS

- DSD 2-ch to 6-ch

- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)

• Content Protection: HDCP compatible

• Link Function: CEC supported

MHL

• Video Format (Repeater Mode)

-VGA

- 480i/60 Hz

- 576i/50 Hz

- 480p/60 Hz

- 576p/50 Hz

- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

- 1080p/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• Audio Format

- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)

• Current Supply Capacity: 1.0 A

TUNER

• Analog Tuner

[U.K. and Europe models]

FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)

[Other models]

FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)

• HD Radio tuner [U.S.A. model] x 1 (TUNER)

Specifications

APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 153

USB

• Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory

• Current Supply Capacity: 2.1 A

Network

• PC Client Function

• Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5

• AirPlay supported

• Internet Radio

• HTC Connect supported

• WiFi function

- Capable of WPS by PIN Method and Push-Button-Method

- Capable of Direct Connection with Mobile Device

- Available Security Method: WEP, WPA-PSK (TKIP), WPA-PSK

(AES), WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode

- Radio Frequency: 2.4GHz

- Wireless Network Standard: IEEE 802.11 b/g

Compatible Decoding Formats

• Decoding Format

- Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus

- Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX

- DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,

DTS Express

- DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1

- DTS Digital Surround

• Post Decoding Format

- Dolby Pro Logic

- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movi

olby Pro Logic II Game

- Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie,

Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game

- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema

Audio Section

• Rated Output Power (2-channel driven)

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 )

Front L/R.............................................................110 W+110 W

Center..............................................................................110 W

Surround L/R ...................................................... 110 W+110 W

Surround Back L/R .............................................110 W+110 W

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )

Front L/R.............................................................120 W+120 W

Center..............................................................................120 W

Surround L/R ...................................................... 120 W+120 W

Surround Back L/R .............................................120 W+120 W

• Rated Output Power (1-channel driven)

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )

Front L/R.....................................................................135 W/ch

Center ........................................................................135 W/ch

Surround L/R ..............................................................135 W/ch

Surround Back L/R .....................................................135 W/ch

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 )

Front L/R [U.K. and Europe models] ..........................170 W/ch

• Maximum Effective Output Power (1-channel driven)

(JEITA, 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8



)

[China, Korea, Asia and General models]

Front L/R.....................................................................165 W/ch

Center.........................................................................165 W/ch

Surround L/R ..............................................................165 W/ch

Surround Back L/R .....................................................165 W/ch

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

Front L/R (8/6/4/2 )...................................135/165/210/280 W

• Damping Factor

Front L/R, 1 kHz, 8  ............................................. 150 or more

• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance

PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 )................................ 3.5 mV/47 k

AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 ) ...................... 200 mV/47 k

• Maximum Input Signal

PHONO (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .............................. 60 mV or more

AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ........................ 2.4 V or more

• Output Level / Output Impedance

AV OUT ............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 k

HEADPHONE OUT............................................. 150 mV/100 

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER (50 Hz)........................................ 1.0 V/1.2 k

Except SUBWOOFER (1 kHz)............................ 1.0 V/1.2 k

ZONE OUT ............................................................ 1.0 V/1.2 k

• Frequency Response

AUDIO 2 etc. (10 Hz to 100 kHz)................................ +0/-3 dB

• RIAA Equalization Deviation

PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) ......................................... 0±0.5 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

PHONO to AV OUT ............................................. 0.02% or less

MULTI CH INPUT to Speaker Out (Pure Direct, 70 W, 8 )

............................................................................ 0.04% or less

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

(Pure Direct, Input 1 k Shorted, Speaker Out)

PHONO .............................................................. 95 dB or more

AUDIO2 etc...................................................... 110 dB or more

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Speaker Out ....................................................... 150 µV or less

• Channel Separation

(Input 1 k Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)

PHONO ....................................................75 dB/60 dB or more

AUDIO2 etc..............................................75 dB/60 dB or more

• Volume Control

Main Zone ................ MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)

Zone2 ....................... MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)

APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 154

• Tone Control Characteristics

Main Zone

Bass Boost/Cut.........................±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)

Bass Turnover............................................................. 350 Hz

Treble Boost/Cut ..................... ±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)

Treble Turnover .......................................................... 3.5 kHz

Zone2

Bass Boost/Cut.............................±10 dB/50 Hz (2 dB Step)

Bass Turnover............................................................. 350 Hz

Treble Boost/Cut ...........................±10 dB/50 Hz (2 dB Step)

Treble Turnover .......................................................... 3.5 kHz

• Filter Characteristics

(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)

H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back: Small)

..................................................................................12 dB/oct.

L.P.F. (Subwoofer).....................................................24 dB/oct.

Video Section

• Video Signal Type

[U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models]................ NTSC

[Other models].................................................................... PAL

• Video Signal Type (Video Conversion) .....................NTSC/PAL

• Video Signal Level

Composite ............................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 

Component

Y.......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 

Pb/Pr ................................................................ 0.7 Vp-p/75 

• Video Maximum Input Level .......................... 1.5 Vp-p or more

• Signal to Noise Ratio ..........................................60 dB or more

• Monitor Out Frequency Response

Component (MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT)

............................................................5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB

FM Section

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ..............87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz

[Asia and General models]

.......................................87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz

[Other models].................................87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz

• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)

Mono .................................................................3 µV (20.8 dBf)

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono/Stereo [except U.S.A. model] .....................71 dB/70 dB

HD [U.S.A. model]........................................................... 80 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo [except U.S.A. model] ....................... 0.5%/0.6%

HD [U.S.A. model]...........................................................0.03%

• Antenna Input................................................75  unbalanced

AM section

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................. 530 kHz to 1710 kHz

[Asia and General models] ..... 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz

[Other models] ........................................ 531 kHz to 1611 kHz

General

• Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ..........................AC 120 V, 60 Hz

[General model] ............AC 110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz

[China model]..................................................AC 220 V, 50 Hz

[Korea model] .................................................AC 220 V, 60 Hz

[Australia model] .............................................AC 240 V, 50 Hz

[U.K. and Europe models] ..............................AC 230 V, 50 Hz

[Asia model] ....................................AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz

• Power Consumption

[U.S.A. model].................................................................450 W

[Canada and Korea models]...........................................380 W

[Other models] ................................................................420 W

• Standby Power Consumption

HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off ..........................0.1 W

HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals)......2.4 W

Network Standby On

Wired .............................................................................3.1 W

Wi-Fi ..............................................................................3.8 W

Wireless Direct ..............................................................3.9 W

HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals),

Network Standby On (Wireless Direct).............................5.5 W

• Maximum Power Consumption

[Asia and General models]...........................................1190 W

• Dimensions (W x H x D)

............................435 x 182 x 432 mm (17-1/8” x 7-1/8” x 17”)

* Including legs and protrusions

• Reference Dimensions (W x H x D) (with wireless antenna)

......................435 x 242 x 439 mm (17-1/8” x 9-1/2” x 17-1/4”)

•

Weight...........................................................14.9 kg (32.8 lbs)

* Specifications are subject to change without notice.

APPENDIX ➤ Index En 155

Symbols

Exclamation mark (!) 128, 132

Lock icon (o) 125

Numerics

16:9 Normal (Aspect, Setup menu) 117

2.1-channel system 17

2ch Stereo (sound program) 59

3.1-channel system 17

4K Ultra HD 149

5.1-channel system 17

5ch BI-AMP (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 111

5ch BI-AMP (speaker configuration) 21

5ch BI-AMP +SB

(Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 111

5ch BI-AMP +SB (speaker configuration) 22

7.1+2-channel system 16

7.1-channel system 16

7ch +1ZONE (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 111

7ch +1ZONE (speaker configuration) 22

7ch Stereo (sound program) 59

A.DRC (YPAO Volume, Option menu) 97

A.Sel (Input Settings, Option menu) 99

Access denied (error indication) 141

Access error (error indication) 141

Access Point Scan (Wireless (Wi-Fi), Setup menu) 50

Action Game (sound program) 59

Adaptive DRC (YPAO Volume, Option menu) 97

Adaptive DSP Level (Sound, Setup menu) 115

Adjustment (Lipsync, Setup menu) 115

ADVANCED SETUP menu 128

Advanced speaker configuration 20

Adventure (sound program) 58

AirPlay 83

Album (HD Radio™) 65

AM radio listening 63

Amp (Audio Output, Setup menu) 118

ARC (Audio Return Channel) 149

ARC (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 118

Artist/Song (HD Radio™) 65

Aspect (Video Mode, Setup menu) 117

Audio Decoder (front display information) 95

Audio file format (PC/NAS) 145

Audio file format (USB storage device) 145

Audio Mode (Option menu) 99

Audio Output (HDMI, Setup menu) 118

Audio program selection (HD Radio™) 65

Audio Return Channel (ARC) 149

Audio Select (Input Settings, Option menu) 99

Audio Signal (Information menu) 127

Auto Power Standby (ECO, Setup menu) 125

Auto Preset (FM radio) 69

Auto Preset (HD Radio™) 67

Auto Setup (Speaker, Setup menu) 38

Auto/Manual Select (Lipsync, Setup menu) 114

Automatic station preset (FM radio) 69

Automatic station preset (HD Radio™) 67

AutoPowerStdby (ECO, Setup menu) 125

Backup/recovery of the settings 131

Banana plug 19

Basic playback operation 54

Basic speaker configuration 16

Bass (Tone Control, Option menu) 97

Bass Cross Over (Speaker, Setup menu) 113

Bitrate (Audio Signal, Information menu) 127

Bitstream 149

Bookmark Off (Internet radio, Option menu) 82

Bookmark On (Internet radio, Option menu) 82

Category (HD Radio™) 65

Cellar Club (sound program) 59

Center (Speaker, Setup menu) 112

Center Image (Sound Program menu) 107

Center Width (Sound Program menu) 107

Chamber (sound program) 59

Channel (Audio Signal, Information menu) 127

Check SP Wires (error indication) 141

Check Sur. (YPAO error message) 44

CINEMA DSP 58

CINEMA DSP 3D 58

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (Sound, Setup menu) 115

CLASSICAL (sound program subcategory) 59

Clear Preset (FM/AM radio) 69

Clear Preset (HD Radio™) 67

Clock Time (Radio Data System) 67

Compressed Music Enhancer 62

Configuration (Speaker, Setup menu) 111

Crossover frequency setting (subwoofer) 38

DC OUT (Function, Setup menu) 124

Decode Type (Sound Program menu) 105

Decoder Mode (Input menu) 101

Decoder Off (front display information) 95

Default Gateway (IP Address, Setup menu) 119

Default Gateway (Network, Information menu) 127

Default setting restoration 131

Delay Enable (Lipsync, Setup menu) 114

Detail (Load, Scene menu) 103

Device Control (Load, Scene menu) 103

DHCP (IP Address, Setup menu) 119

Dialog (Option menu) 98

Dialog Lift (Dialogue, Option menu) 98

Dialog Lvl (Dialogue, Option menu) 98

Dialogue (Audio Signal, Information menu) 127

Dialogue (Option menu) 98

Dialogue Level (Dialogue, Option menu) 98

Dialogue Lift (Dialogue, Option menu) 98

Dialogue normalization level 127

Index

APPENDIX ➤ Index En 156

Digital Media Controller (DMC) 101

Dimension (Sound Program menu) 107

Dimmer (Front Display) (Display Set, Setup menu) 123

Direct (Sound Program menu) 106

Direct Stream Digital (DSD) 142

Display Set (Function, Setup menu) 123

Distance (Speaker, Setup menu) 113

Distance (YPAO measurement result) 43

DLNA 76

DMC (Digital Media Controller) 101

DMC Control (Input menu) 101

DNS Server (IP Address, Setup menu) 119

DNS Server (Network, Information menu) 127

Dolby Digital EX (Extended Surround) 116

Dolby Pro Logic (surround decoder) 61

Dolby Pro Logic II (surround decoder) 61

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (surround decoder) 61

Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie (Extended Surround) 116

Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music (Extended Surround) 116

Drama (sound program) 58

DSD (Direct Stream Digital) 142

DSP Level (Sound Program menu) 105

DSP Program (front display information) 95

DTS Neo:6 (surround decoder) 61

DTS-ES (Extended Surround) 116

Dynamic Range (Sound, Setup menu) 115

ECO (Setup menu) 125

ECO Mode (ECO, Setup menu) 126

Enhancer (Option menu) 98

ENHANCER (sound mode) 62

ENTERTAINMENT (sound program subcategory) 59

Error indication (front display) 141

EX/ES (Extended Surround, Setup menu) 116

Extended Surround (Sound, Setup menu) 116

External power amplifier 24

Extra Bass (Subwoofer/Bass, Option menu) 98

Filter (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 119

FIRM UPDATE (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 131

Firmware update 131

Firmware update (network) 131

Firmware update (USB) 131

Firmware Version (System, Information menu) 128

Firmware version check 131

FM Mode (Option menu) 99

FM radio listening 63

FM/AM radio tuning 63

Format (Audio Signal, Information menu) 127

Frequency (FM/AM radio) 63

Frequency step setting 63

, 130

Front (Speaker, Setup menu) 112

Front / Rear Balance (Sound Program menu) 106

Front 5.1-channel system 17

Front display (part names and functions) 10

Front display brightness 123

Front display information 95

Front panel (part names and functions) 8

Front panel door (front panel) 8

Front Presence (Speaker, Setup menu) 112

Function (Setup menu) 123

Ground lead 30

Hall in Munich (sound program) 59

Hall in Vienna (sound program) 59

HD Radio™ information 65

HD Radio™ tuning 65

HDMI (Setup menu) 117

HDMI Control (HDMI, Setup menu) 117

HDMI Monitor (Information menu) 127

HDMI OUT1 (Audio Output, Setup menu) 118

HDMI OUT2 (Audio Output, Setup menu) 118

HDMI OUT2 Assign (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 122

HDMI output selection 54

HDMI signal compatibility 149

Headphones 60

Height Balance (Sound Program menu) 106

High definition audio 149

HTC Connect 145

In.Trim (Input Settings, Option menu) 99

Indicator (part names and functions) 10

Information display (front display) 10

Information menu 126

Information switching (front display) 95

Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 105

Initial Volume (Sound, Setup menu) 115

Initial Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 121

INITIALIZE (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 131

Input (Audio Signal, Information menu) 127

Input Assignment (Function, Setup menu) 123

Input jack assignment 123

Input menu 100

Input Settings (Option menu) 99

Input Trim (Input Settings, Option menu) 99

Internal Error (error indication) 141

Internal Error (YPAO error message) 44

Internet radio listening 80

IP Address (Network, Information menu) 127

IP Address (Network, Setup menu) 119

iPod charge 70

iPod content playback 70

iPod content playback (AirPlay) 83

iTunes content playback (AirPlay) 83

Language (Setup menu) 126

Layout (Speaker, Setup menu) 113

Left / Right Balance (Sound Program menu) 106

Level (Sound Program menu) 106

Level (Speaker, Setup menu) 113

Level (YPAO measurement result) 43

Level Error (YPAO warning message) 45

LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 143

Lipsync 143

Lipsync (Sound, Setup menu) 114

LIVE/CLUB (sound program subcategory) 59

APPENDIX ➤ Index En 157

Liveness (Sound Program menu) 106

Load (Scene menu) 103

Low Frequency Effects (LFE) 143

MAC Address (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 120

MAC Address (Network, Information menu) 127

MAC Address Filter (Network, Setup menu) 119

Main Zone Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 121

Manual Setting (Wireless (Wi-Fi), Setup menu) 50

Manual Setup (Speaker, Setup menu) 111

Manual speaker configuration 111

Manual station preset (FM/AM radio) 64

Max Volume (Sound, Setup menu) 115

Max Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 121

Measurement result (YPAO) 43

Media sharing setup 76

Memory Guard (Function, Setup menu) 125

Menu language selection 37

MHL Overloaded (error indication) 141

MHL-compatible mobile device 31

Monaural Mix (Sound Program menu) 106

Monaural reception (FM radio) 63

Monitor check 130

MONITOR CHECK (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 130

Monitor Out Assign (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 122

Mono (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 122

Mono Movie (sound program) 58

MOVIE (sound program category) 58

MOVIE THEATER (sound program subcategory) 58

Multi measurement (YPAO) 41

Multi Zone (Information menu) 128

Multi Zone (Setup menu) 121

Multiple room playback 85

Multi-zone 85

Multi-zone output 147

MUSIC (sound program category) 59

Music Video (sound program) 59

Muting 54

NAS (Network Attached Storage) 34

NAS content playback 77

Network (Information menu) 127

Network (Setup menu) 119

Network Attached Storage (NAS) 34

Network Connection (Network, Information menu) 127

Network Connection (Network, Setup menu) 119

Network information 127

Network Name (Network, Information menu) 127

Network Name (Network, Setup menu) 120

Network Standby (Network, Setup menu) 119

No content (error indication) 141

No device (error indication) 141

No F.PRNS SP (YPAO error message) 44

No Front SP (YPAO error message) 44

No MIC (YPAO error message) 44

No Signal (YPAO error message) 44

No Sur. SP (YPAO error message) 44

Noisy (YPAO error message) 44

NTSC (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) 130

Option menu 96

Out of Phase (YPAO warning message) 45

Output (Audio Signal, Information menu) 127

Over Distance (YPAO warning message) 45

PAL (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) 130

Panorama (Sound Program menu) 107

Parametric EQ (Speaker, Setup menu) 113

Party mode 91

Party Mode Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 122

PC content playback 77

PIN Code (Wireless (Wi-Fi), Setup menu) 51

Please wait (error indication) 141

Power Amp Assign (Speaker, Setup menu) 111

Power management 125

Power Mode (DC OUT, Setup menu) 124

Preset station selection (FM/AM radio) 64

Program Service (Radio Data System) 67

Program Type (Radio Data System) 67

Pure Direct 62

PURE DIRECT (sound mode) 62

Pure Direct Mode (Sound, Setup menu) 115

Q factor 114

Radio Data System information 67

Radio Data System tuning 67

Radio Text (Radio Data System) 67

Rear panel (part names and functions) 11

RECOV./BACKUP (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 131

RemID Mismatch (error indication) 141

REMOTE CON AMP (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 129

Remote control (part names and functions) 13

Remote control ID setting 129

Remote control sensor setting 129

Remote ID (System, Information menu) 128

Remote Off (error indication) 141

REMOTE SENSOR (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 129

Rename (input name) 101

Rename (network name) 120

Rename (scene name) 104

Rename/Icon Select (Input menu) 101

Rename/Icon Select (Scene menu) 104

Repeat (iPod, Option menu) 72

Repeat (PC/NAS, Option menu) 79

Repeat (USB storage device, Option menu) 75

Reset (Scene menu) 104

Resolution (Video Mode, Setup menu) 116

Reverb Delay (Sound Program menu) 106

Reverb Level (Sound Program menu) 106

Reverb Time (Sound Program menu) 106

Reverse (Wiring, YPAO measurement result) 43

Roleplaying Game (sound program) 59

Room Size (Sound Program menu) 105

APPENDIX ➤ Index En 158

Sampling (Audio Signal, Information menu) 127

Save (Scene menu) 102

SBR → SBL (YPAO error message) 44

Scene configuration 56

SCENE function 55

SCENE link playback 56

Scene menu 102

Sci-Fi (sound program) 58

Security (Network, Information menu) 127

Security Key (Network, Information menu) 127

Setting Data Copy (Speaker, Setup menu) 111

Setting Pattern (Speaker, Setup menu) 111

Setup menu 108

Share Wi-Fi Settings (iOS)

(Wireless (Wi-Fi), Setup menu) 47

Short Message (Display Set, Setup menu) 123

Shuffle (iPod, Option menu) 72

Shuffle (PC/NAS, Option menu) 79

Shuffle (USB storage device, Option menu) 75

Signal information 127

SILENT CINEMA 60

Simple play (iPod) 72

Single measurement (YPAO) 40

Size (YPAO measurement result) 43

Sleep timer 13

Sleep timer (Zone2) 91

Sound (Setup menu) 114

Sound field effect 58

Sound mode selection 57

Sound program 58

, 59

Sound Program menu 104

Speaker (Setup menu) 111

SPEAKER IMP. (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 129

Speaker impedance 15

Speaker Impedance (System, Information menu) 128

Speaker impedance setting 18

, 129

Speaker placement 16

Spectacle (sound program) 58

Sports (sound program) 59

SSID 144

SSID (Network, Information menu) 127

Standard (sound program) 58

Standby Sync (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 118

Standby Through (HDMI, Setup menu) 118

Station Info (HD Radio™) 65

Station preset (FM/AM radio) 64

STEREO (sound program subcategory) 59

Stereo reception (FM radio) 63

STRAIGHT (sound mode) 61

Straight decode 61

Subnet Mask (IP Address, Setup menu) 119

Subnet Mask (Network, Information menu) 127

Subwoofer (Speaker, Setup menu) 113

Subwoofer Trim (Subwoofer/Bass, Option menu) 98

Subwoofer/Bass (Option menu) 98

SUR.DECODE (sound mode) 61

Surround (Speaker, Setup menu) 112

Surround Back (Speaker, Setup menu) 112

Surround Back Initial Delay

(Sound Program menu) 105

Surround Back Liveness (Sound Program menu) 106

Surround Back Room Size

(Sound Program menu) 105

Surround decoder 61

Surround Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 105

Surround Liveness (Sound Program menu) 106

Surround Room Size (Sound Program menu) 105

SW.Trim (Subwoofer/Bass, Option menu) 98

System (Information menu) 128

System ID (System, Information menu) 128

Target Zone (Trigger Output, Setup menu) 124

Test Tone (Speaker, Setup menu) 114

The Bottom Line (sound program) 59

The Roxy Theatre (sound program) 59

Tone Control (Option menu) 97

TP (Traffic Program) 68

Traffic information (Radio Data System) 68

Traffic Program (FM radio, Option menu) 68

Treble (Tone Control, Option menu) 97

Trigger function 36

Trigger Mode (Trigger Output, Setup menu) 124

Trigger Output1 (Function, Setup menu) 124

Trigger Output2 (Function, Setup menu) 124

TUNER FRQ STEP (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 130

Tuner Frq. Step (System, Information menu) 128

TV Audio Input (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 117

TV FORMAT (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 130

TV Format (System, Information menu) 128

Unable to play (error indication) 141

USB Overloaded (error indication) 141

USB storage device content playback 73

User Cancel (YPAO error message) 44

V.Out (Input Settings, Option menu) 99

VERSION (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 131

Version error (error indication) 141

Video (Setup menu) 116

Video Mode (Video, Setup menu) 116

Video Out (Input Settings, Option menu) 99

Video Process. (Option menu) 99

Video Processing (Option menu) 99

Video Signal (Information menu) 127

Video signal flow 146

Video signal type setting 130

Virtual CINEMA DSP 60

Virtual CINEMA FRONT 60

Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) 7

Voltage selection 36

Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 121

Volume Interlock (Input menu) 101

VPS (Virtual Presence Speaker) 7

Wallpaper (Display Set, Setup menu) 123

Web control 92

Wi-Fi 144

APPENDIX ➤ Index En 159

Wired (Network Connection, Setup menu) 119

Wired/Wireless (Network, Information menu) 127

Wireless (Wi-Fi)

(Network Connection, Setup menu) 47

, 119

Wireless Direct

(Network Connection, Setup menu) 52

, 119

Wiring (YPAO measurement result) 43

WPS 144

WPS Button (Wireless (Wi-Fi), Setup menu) 49

WPS button configuration 48

Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer

(YPAO) 38

YPAO

(Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) 38

YPAO error message 44

YPAO microphone 38

YPAO Vol. (YPAO Volume, Option menu) 97

YPAO Volume (Option menu) 97

YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume, Option menu) 97

YPAO warning message 45

Zone Rename (Main Zone Set, Setup menu) 121

Zone Rename (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 122

Zone Scene Rename (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 122

Zone2 Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 121

Transcripción de documentos

AV Receiver Owner’s Manual Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit. English CONTENTS Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 FEATURES 6 8 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . . 38 Measuring at one listening position (single measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Checking the measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Selecting the connection method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Connecting the unit to a wireless network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 PREPARATIONS 14 General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 1 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Basic speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Advanced speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 2 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 PLAYBACK 54 Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Selecting an HDMI output jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 3 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Selecting setting items to be included as scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 5 Connecting a network cable or the wireless antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Connecting the network cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Connecting the wireless antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 6 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Connecting recording devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Connecting a device with analog multi-channel output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Setting the frequency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 HD Radio™ tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Operating the radio on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 7 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 En 2 Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 CONFIGURATIONS 100 Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Configuring input sources (Input menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Input menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Playback of Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Scene menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Sound Program menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Speaker (Manual Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Playing back music with AirPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Multi-zone configuration examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Preparing Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Multi Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Controlling Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Viewing the status information on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) . . . . . . . . . 126 Types of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . 128 ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Updating the unit’s firmware via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 En 3 APPENDIX 133 Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Power, system and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Network information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Supported devices and file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Multi-zone output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Audio Return Channel (ARC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Reference diagram (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 En 4 Accessories Operating range of the remote control Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product. • Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range shown below.  Remote control  Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2) Within 6 m (20 ft) 30° 30° Insert the batteries the right way round.  AM antenna  FM antenna *One of the above is supplied depending on the region of purchase.  YPAO microphone  Wireless antenna • The illustrations of the main unit and remote control used in this manual are of the U.S.A. model, unless otherwise specified. • (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only) For information on how to control external devices with the remote control, refer to “Supplement for Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM.  Power cable  CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual)  Easy Setup Guide  Safety Brochure • Some features are not available in certain regions. • Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice. • This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control. • This manual describes all the “iPod”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to “iPod”, “iPhone” and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified. *The supplied power cable varies depending on the region of purchase. • indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations. • indicates supplementary explanations for better use. Accessories En 5 FEATURES What you can do with the unit Wide variety of supported content • iPod/iPhone/iPad . p.70 • USB . p.73 • Media server (PC/NAS) . p.76 • Internet radio . p.80 • AirPlay . p.83 Supports 2- to 7-channel (plus front presence) speaker system and up to 2 subwoofer connections. Allows you to enjoy favorite acoustic spaces in various styles. • Automatically optimizing the speaker . p.38 settings to suit your room (YPAO) • Reproducing stereo or multichannel . p.58 sounds with the sound fields like actual movie theaters and concert halls (CINEMA DSP) • Enjoying compressed music with . p.62 enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) Control Network contents Speakers iPod/iPhone/iPad Audio • Bi-amp connections, channel expansion (with external power-amp) and multi-zone configurations to enhance your system . p.20 Audio USB device HDMI Control 3D and 4K Ultra HD signals supported Audio HDMI Control Audio/Video BD/DVD player Audio/Video TV Control Audio/Video (via HDMI/MHL) Smartphone/Tablet AV receiver (the unit) Sequential operation of a TV, AV receiver, and BD/DVD player (HDMI Control) Change the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) . p.55 TV remote control . p.147 FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 6 Full of useful functions! Useful tips ❑ Connecting various devices (p.28) ❑ Creating 3-dimensional sound fields (p.58) A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players), game consoles, camcorders, and other devices. Connecting front presence speakers allows you to create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in your own room (CINEMA DSP 3D). Even when no front presence speakers are connected, the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) function produces 3D surround sound. ❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound with a single HDMI cable connection (Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.26) I want to connect a playback device using HDMI for video and non-HDMI for audio... Use “Audio Select” in the “Option” menu to specify the type of an audio input jack to be used for the corresponding input source (p.99). Video and audio are not synchronized... Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay between video and audio output (p.114). I want to hear audio from the TV speakers... When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control signals. Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the output destination of signals input into the unit (p.118). Your TV speakers may be selected as an output destination. I want to get more bass sounds… HDMI Control TV audio Set “Extra Bass” in the “Option” menu to “On” to enjoy enhanced bass sounds (p.98). Video from external device I want to change the on-screen menu language... ❑ Various wireless connection methods (p.46) The unit supports the Wi-Fi feature that allows the unit to connect to your wireless router (access point) without a network cable connection. In addition, Wireless Direct enables connecting a mobile device to the unit directly without router. Wi-Fi or Wireless Direct ❑ Surround playback with 5 speakers placed in front (p.60) If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your room, you can place them in the front and enjoy multi-channel surround sound with the 5 speakers placed in the front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT). Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a language from English, Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.37). I want to update the firmware... Use “FIRM UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to update the unit’s firmware (p.131). If the unit is connected to the Internet, a message will be displayed on the TV when a firmware update is available (p.132). ❑ Low power consumption (p.126) Many other settings are available that let you to customize the unit. For details, see the following pages. The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the unit’s power consumption. • Input settings (p.100) ❑ Easy operation and wireless music playback from iPhone or Android™ device • Sound program and surround decoder settings (p.105) By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices. Visit the Yamaha website for details. • SCENE settings (p.102) • Various function settings (p.109) • Information view (such as audio signal and video signal) (p.127) • System settings (p.129) FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 7 Part names and functions Front panel 1 2 3 4 5 MAIN ZONE PURE DIRECT INPUT 6 1 MAIN ZONE z key Turns on/off (standby) the unit. 2 Standby indicator Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the following conditions. • HDMI Control is enabled (p.117) • Standby Through is enabled (p.118) • Network Standby is enabled (p.119) • An iPod is being charged (p.70) VOLUME 7 5 PURE DIRECT key Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.62). 6 INPUT knob Selects an input source. 7 Front panel door 8 Opening the front panel door • To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently press the bottom of the door to open it. Keep the door closed when not using controls or jacks behind the front panel door. (Be careful not to trap your fingers.) For protecting controls and jacks (p.9). 8 VOLUME knob Adjusts the volume. 3 Front display Displays information (p.10). 4 Remote control sensor Receives remote control signals (p.5). FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 8 ■ Inside of the front panel door 9 0 ON SCREEN AB C OPTION DE F GH SCENE TONE/BALANCE STRAIGHT 1 2 3 K INFO(WPS) MEMORY PRESET FM AM TUNING L 4 MULTI ZONE PROGRAM IJ ENTER ZONE 2 RETURN ZONE CONTROL DISPLAY PHONES VIDEO AUX SILENT CINEMA YPAO MIC 5V M 9 ON SCREEN key Displays the on-screen menu on the TV. 0 Menu operations keys Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter. ENTER Confirms a selected item. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. A OPTION key Displays the option menu (p.96). B DISPLAY key 2.1A VIDEO N O Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of output sounds (p.97). Adjusts the left/right channel volume balance for Zone2 (p.91). D STRAIGHT key Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.61). AUDIO HDMI/ MHL 5V 1A R P E PROGRAM keys J FM and AM keys Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.57). F SCENE keys G MULTI ZONE keys ZONE 2 ZONE CONTROL Switch between FM and AM (p.63). K PRESET keys Select the registered input source, sound program, and various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.55). Displays status information on the TV (p.95). C TONE/BALANCE key L Enables/disables the audio output to Zone2 (p.90). Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2) that is controlled by the keys and knobs on the front panel (p.90). H INFO (WPS) key Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.95). Enters the wireless network connection setup (WPS push button configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.48). I MEMORY key Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.64). Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.64). L TUNING keys Select the radio frequency (p.63). M USB jack For connecting a USB storage device (p.73) or an iPod (p.70). N YPAO MIC jack For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.38). O PHONES jack For connecting headphones. P VIDEO AUX jacks For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game console (p.31, 32) or a smartphone (p.31). FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 9 Front display (indicators) 1 23 4 6 5 7 8 9 ECO MUTE VOLUME ZONE ZONE ZONE SLEEP 3 4 IN OUT 1 2 3 2 ENHANCER PARTY HD STEREO TUNED 3 0A B C Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output. IN Lights up when HDMI signals are being input. OUT1/OUT2 Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI signal. 2 ECO Lights up when the unit is in the eco mode (p.126). 3 Signal strength indicator Indicates the strength of the wireless network signal (p.46). 4 ZONE2 Lights up when Zone2 is enabled (p.90). 5 SLEEP Lights up when the sleep timer is on. 6 Information display Displays the current status (such as input name and sound mode name). You can switch the information by pressing INFO (p.95). Blinks when audio is muted. FPL L C R FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR D 1 HDMI 7 MUTE ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL DE 8 Volume indicator Indicates the current volume. 9 VIRTUAL Lights up when the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.58) or the virtual surround processing (p.60) is working. 0 ENHANCER Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.62) is working. A STEREO Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal. TUNED Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station signal. HD (U.S.A. model only) Lights up when the unit is receiving an HD Radio station signal. F D Cursor indicators Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational. E ADAPTIVE DRC Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.97) is working. F Speaker indicators Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output. A Front speaker (L) S Front speaker (R) D Center speaker F Surround speaker (L) G Surround speaker (R) H Surround back speaker (L) J Surround back speaker (R) K Surround back speaker B Front presence speaker (L) N Front presence speaker (R) L Subwoofer B CINEMA DSP Lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.58) is working. “CINEMA DSP n” lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D (p.58) is activated. C PARTY Lights up when the unit is in the party mode. (p.91) FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 10 Rear panel 1 2 3 DC OUT 5V 4 5 6 8 9 : A B HDMI HDMI OUT 2 0.5A 7 1 (ZONE OUT) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 5 AV 6 E (U.S.A. model) NETWORK AV 4 C D ( 3 NET ) AV 7 WIRELESS (1 BD/DVD) ARC AC IN PHONO AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) AV OUT MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO PR Y AV 2 PB TRIGGER OUT PR REMOTE B 1 RS-232C IN GND OUT 2 A AUDIO 1 (2 TV) L C Y PB AV 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 PR Y AUDIO 4 AV 3 PB PR MULTI CH INPUT 12V 0.1AMAX. TOTAL ZONE OUT CENTER PRE OUT (SINGLE) SURROUND SUR. BACK 1 R 2 1 COAXIAL 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL 4 OPTICAL 5 OPTICAL FRONT 6 COAXIAL SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER ZONE 2 FRONT SUBWOOFER CENTER SPEAKERS R ANTENNA 75Ω FM HD Radio AM SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/ R BI–AMP EXTRA SP L CENTER R FRONT L (4 RADIO) SINGLE 1 PHONO jacks For connecting to a turntable (p.30). 2 DC OUT jack For connecting to an optional accessory. 3 AV 1–4 jacks For connecting to video/audio playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.28). 4 HDMI OUT 1 jack For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.26). When using ARC, TV audio signal can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack. HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.28), or for connecting to an HDMI-compatible device used in Zone2 (p.88). 5 AV OUT jacks For outputting video/audio to a recording device (such as a VCR) (p.35). 6 MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT component/composite video jacks For connecting to a TV that supports component or composite video and outputting video signals (p.27) or for connecting to a Zone2 video monitor (p.87). 7 COMPONENT VIDEO (AV 1–3) jacks For connecting to video playback devices that support component video and inputting video signals (p.29). 8 HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.28). * The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. B RS-232C terminal This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation. Consult your dealer for details. C WIRELESS jack For connecting the supplied wireless antenna (p.34). D VOLTAGE SELECTOR (General model only) Selects the switch position according to your local voltage (p.36). E AC IN jack For connecting the supplied power cable (p.36). 9 TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks For connecting to devices that support the trigger function (p.36). 0 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another room (p.89). A NETWORK jack For connecting to a network with a network cable (p.34). FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 11 DC OUT 5V HDMI HDMI OUT 2 0.5A 1 (ZONE OUT) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 (U.S.A. model) NETWORK AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 ( 3 NET ) AV 7 WIRELESS (1 BD/DVD) ARC AC IN PHONO AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) AV OUT MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO PR Y AV 2 PB TRIGGER OUT PR REMOTE B 1 RS-232C IN GND OUT 2 A AUDIO 1 (2 TV) L C Y PB AV 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 PR Y AUDIO 4 AV 3 PB PR MULTI CH INPUT 12V 0.1AMAX. TOTAL ZONE OUT CENTER PRE OUT (SINGLE) SURROUND SUR. BACK 1 R 2 1 COAXIAL 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL 4 OPTICAL 5 OPTICAL FRONT 6 COAXIAL SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER ZONE 2 FRONT SUBWOOFER CENTER SPEAKERS R ANTENNA 75Ω FM HD Radio AM SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/ R BI–AMP EXTRA SP L CENTER R FRONT L (4 RADIO) SINGLE F G F ANTENNA jacks For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.33). G AUDIO 1–4 jacks For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting audio signals (p.30). H I J K * The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. J SPEAKERS terminals For connecting to speakers (p.15). K PRE OUT jacks For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.18) or to an external power amplifier (p.24). H MULTI CH INPUT jacks For connecting to a device that supports multi-channel output and inputting audio signals (p.35). I ZONE OUT jacks For connecting to the external amplifier used in Zone2 and for outputting audio (p.87). FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 12 Remote control 1 Remote control signal transmitter 1 Transmits infrared signals. 2 z (receiver power) key 2 Turns on/off (standby) the unit. AV 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 3 Input selection keys AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT TUNER 4 MAIN ZONE 2 SCENE 5 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO 6 PROGRAM 7 TOP MENU 8 VOLUME MUTE POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION 9 B C D E 4 MAIN/ZONE2 switch H I J Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2) that is controlled by the remote control (p.90). 5 SCENE keys Select the registered input source, sound program, and various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.55). 6 PROGRAM keys ENTER Select a sound program (p.57). RETURN : A F G Select an input source for playback. AV 1–7 AV 1–7 jacks V-AUX VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel) AUDIO 1–4 AUDIO 1–4 jacks PHONO PHONO jacks MULTI MULTI CH INPUT jacks USB USB jack (on the front panel) NET NETWORK sources (press repeatedly to select a desired network source) TUNER FM/AM radio DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET 7 External device operation keys Displays menus for the HDMI Control-compatible playback device (p.147). 8 ON SCREEN key SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE K MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT Displays the on-screen menu on the TV. 9 Menu operation keys Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter. ENTER Confirms a selected item. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. 0 MODE key Switches the iPod operation modes (p.72). (U.S.A. model only) Selects an HD Radio audio program (p.65). (U.S.A. model) A Radio keys Operate the FM/AM radio when “TUNER” is selected as the input source (p.63). BAND Switches between FM and AM radio. PRESET Select a preset station. TUNING Select the radio frequency. External device operation keys Let you perform playback operations when “USB” or “NET” is selected as the input source, or control playback of the HDMI Control-compatible playback device (p.147). B Sound mode keys Select a sound mode (p.57). C INFO key Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.95). D SLEEP key Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off). E Numeric keys Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies. MEMORY key Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets (p.64). F HDMI OUT key Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output (p.54). G PARTY key Turns on/off the party mode (p.91). H VOLUME keys Adjust the volume. I MUTE key Mutes the audio output. J OPTION key Displays the option menu (p.96). K DISPLAY key Displays status information on the TV (p.95). • (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only) For information on the keys other than those above, refer to “Supplement for Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM. FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 13 PREPARATIONS General setup procedure 1 Connecting speakers (p.15) Basic speaker configuration (p.16) Select the speaker layout and connect the speakers to the unit. Advanced speaker configuration (p.20) Apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance the system. 2 Connecting a TV (p.26) Connect a TV to the unit. 3 Connecting playback devices (p.28) Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit. 4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.33) Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit. 5 Connecting a network cable or the wireless antenna (p.34) Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or connect the supplied wireless antenna for establishing a wireless network connection. 6 Connecting other devices (p.35) Connect external devices such as recording devices. 7 Connecting the power cable (p.36) After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable. 8 Selecting an on-screen menu language (p.37) Select the desired on-screen menu language (default: English). 9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) (p.38) Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room (YPAO). 10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly (p.46) Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a wireless connection. This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit! PREPARATIONS ➤ General setup procedure En 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 Connecting speakers The unit has 7 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 9 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers to create the favorite acoustic space in your room. You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system (p.20). Caution • Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6  MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.18). Ideal speaker layout Functions of each speaker Speaker type Abbr. Front (L) 1 Function Front (R) 2 Center 3 Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogues and vocals). Surround (L) 4 Surround (R) 5 Produce surround left/right channel sounds. Surround speakers also produce surround back channel sounds when no surround back speakers are connected. Surround back (L) 6 E Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds). 1.8 m (5.9 ft) 7 Front presence (L) E Front presence (R) R Subwoofer 9 1 9 Produce surround back left/right channel sounds. Surround back (R) R 0.5 to 1 m (1.6 to 3.3 ft) 0.5 to 1 m (1.6 to 3.3 ft) 1.8 m (5.9 ft) 2 3 9 Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds. In combination with CINEMA DSP 3D (p.58), the front presence speakers create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in your room. Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces bass parts of other channels. This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers to the unit and place them on the left/right (or front/rear) sides of the room. 4 5 10°~30° 10°~30° 6 • We recommend using front presence speakers to have a full effect of the 3-dimensional sound fields. However, the unit creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce 3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected (p.58). 7 0.3 m (1 ft) or more • Use “Ideal speaker layout” (diagram on the right) as reference. You do not need to exactly adjust the speaker layout to this diagram since the YPAO function of the unit will automatically optimize the speaker settings (such as distances) to suit the speaker layout. • When using only one surround back speaker, place it straight behind the listening position (middle of “SBL” and “SBR” in the diagram). PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Basic speaker configuration ■ Placing speakers in your room Depending on the number of speakers, place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This section describes the representative speaker layout examples. ❑ 7.1+2-channel system (using both surround back and front presence speakers) ❑ 7.1-channel system (using front presence speakers) This speaker system brings out the full performance of the unit and allows you to enjoy a highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field with any contents. This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying 5.1-channel contents. ❑ 7.1-channel system (using surround back speakers) • The surround back speakers and front presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. The unit automatically changes the speakers to be used, depending on the selected CINEMA DSP (p.58). This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ❑ 5.1-channel system ❑ Front 5.1-channel system (using front presence speakers) E R 1 9 2 3 This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying 5.1-channel contents. This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field, and creates the virtual surround speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP). ❑ Front 5.1-channel system (using surround speakers) ❑ 2.1-channel system 1 2 4 9 5 3 Even when surround speakers are placed in the front side, the unit creates the virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) when “Layout (Surround)” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”. Even when no surround speakers are connected, the unit creates the virtual surround speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP). • You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (front 4.1-channel system). • Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1-channel system. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ Setting the speaker impedance ■ Connecting speakers Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When using a 6-ohm speaker for any channel, set the speaker impedance to “6  MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit. 1 Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall outlet. 2 While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z. MAIN ZONE z Caution • Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before connecting the speakers. • Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on. Speakers to be connected STRAIGHT Room 3 Check that “SPEAKER IMP.” is displayed on the front display. SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 4 5 SPEAKERIMP. 8MIN Speaker system (the number of channels) Speaker type Abbr. 7+2 7 5 2 Front (L) 1 ● ● ● ● Front (R) 2 ● ● ● ● Center 3 ● ● ● Surround (L) 4 ● ● *3 Surround (R) 5 ● ● *3 Surround back (L) 6 ● *1 Surround back (R) 7 ● *1 Front presence (L) E ● *2 *4 Front presence (R) R ● *2 *4 Power Amp Assign (p.111) MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Press STRAIGHT to select “6  MIN”. Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and remove the power cable from the AC wall outlet. You are now ready to connect the speakers. Main zone Basic (default) If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers (*1) or front presence speakers (*2). If you have five speakers, use two of them as surround speakers (*3) or front presence speakers (*4). • You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit. • To use an external power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier, etc.) to enhance speaker output, see “Connecting an external power amplifier” (p.24). PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Cables necessary for connection (commercially available) ❑ Connecting speaker cables Speaker cables (x the number of speakers) Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the unit and the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire to the positive terminal. + – + – Audio pin cable (two for connecting two subwoofers) a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable, and twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together. Connection diagram b Loosen the speaker terminal. Refer to the following diagram and connect the speakers to the unit. c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the terminal. d Tighten the terminal. The unit (rear) + (red) + b FR c ON T - a d – (black) Using a banana plug (U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia and General models only) a Tighten the speaker terminal. E R 1 b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal. a 2 Banana plug 9 3 9 4 5 + FR ON T b ❑ Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer. 6 7 Audio pin cable PRE OUT (SING LE) 1 2 SURR UND SUR. BA CK SUBW OOFE R CENT ER CENT ER FRO NT • When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 19 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Advanced speaker configuration In addition to the basic speaker configuration (p.16), the unit also allows you to apply the following speaker configurations to enhance your system. Using the four internal amplifiers for front speakers to have more high-quality sounds Bi-amp connection Combining with an external power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier, etc.) to build an extended system Using the excess internal amplifiers for stereo speakers in another room Power-amp channel expansion (Example) Multi-zone configuration (Example) (Example) External power amplifier Bi-amp connection Zone2 Main zone PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ Available speaker configurations ❑ 5ch BI-AMP Main zone Output channel (max) Bi-amp 5  7  7 Bi-amp External power amplifier (required) Multi-zone Surround back +1 (Zone2) Power Amp Assign (p.111) Page 5ch BI-AMP 21 5ch BI-AMP +SB 22 7ch +1ZONE 22 1 2 3 9 4 9 5 • When applying one of these configurations, you need to configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.111) in the “Setup” menu. Speaker Connect to 12 FRONT and EXTRA SP (bi-amp connection) 3 CENTER 45 SURROUND 67 (not used) ER (not used) 9 SUBWOOFER 1–2 PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ❑ 5ch BI-AMP +SB ❑ 7ch +1ZONE Bi-amp 1 9 1 2 3 9 9 4 1 5 6 7 2 9 3 4 5 6 2 7 Zone2 Main zone via external amp Speaker Connect to Speaker Connect to 12 FRONT and EXTRA SP (bi-amp connection) 12 FRONT 3 CENTER 3 CENTER 45 SURROUND 45 SURROUND 67 SUR.BACK (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier 67 SURROUND BACK ER (not used) ER (not used) 9 SUBWOOFER 1–2 9 SUBWOOFER 1–2 Zone2 speakers EXTRA SP • When Zone2 output is enabled (p.90), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections ■ Connecting Zone2 speakers When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP terminals. When using Zone2 speakers, connect them to the EXTRA SP terminals. To enable the bi-amp function, configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.111) in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet. To utilize the EXTRA SP terminals for Zone2 speakers, configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.111) in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet. The unit (rear) The unit (rear) 1 1 9 2 4 3 FL 9 FR 9 4 3 9 2 5 6 7 Zone2 5 Main zone • You can also connect Zone2 speakers using an external amplifier (p.87). • The FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP terminals output the same signals. Caution • Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker cables. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 23 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ Connecting an external power amplifier When connecting an external power amplifier to enhance speaker output, connect the input jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit. The same channel signals are output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. (Example) Connecting front speakers via an external power amplifier PRE OUT (FRONT) jacks Main input jack Caution MAIN IN PR • To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure the followings before making connections. – Remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the external power amplifier before connecting them. – When using the PRE OUT jacks, do not connect speakers to the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. – When using a pre-main amplifier that does not have the volume control bypass, turn up the volume of the pre-main amplifier enough and fix it. In this case, do not connect other devices (except the unit) to the pre-main amplifier. FRONT L L R R Amplifier with volume control bypass (such as A-S3000) SUR The unit (rear) The unit (rear) 1 23 4 1 FRONT jacks Output front channel sounds. 2 SURROUND jacks Output surround channel sounds. 3 SUR. BACK jacks About external power amplifiers We recommend using power amplifiers that meet the following conditions. • With unbalanced inputs • With volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit) • Output power: 100 W or more (6 to 8 ) Output surround back channel sounds. When using only one surround back speaker, connect the external amplifier to the SINGLE jack (L side). 4 CENTER jack Outputs center channel sounds. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 24 Input/output jacks and cables ■ Video/audio jacks ■ Video jacks ■ Audio jacks ❑ HDMI jacks ❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ❑ OPTICAL jacks Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single jack. Use an HDMI cable. Transmit video signals separated into three components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB), and chrominance red (PR). Use a component video cable with three plugs. Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before using the cable. AV 1 HDMI cable Digital optical cable EN PON COM Component video cable AV 1 A • Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality degradation. ❑ COAXIAL jacks ❑ VIDEO jacks • The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K Ultra HD video transmission features. Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable. AV 1 Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial cable. Digital coaxial cable Video pin cable • Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K Ultra HD videos. ❑ HDMI/MHL jack Transmits digital video and digital sound. Use an MHL or HDMI cable. ❑ AUDIO jacks Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin cable (RCA cable). MHL or HDMI cable Stereo pin cable • The VIDEO AUX jack on the front panel of the unit supports both MHL and HDMI connections. Use a cable that matches the jack on your MHL-compatible mobile device. For details on an MHL connection, see “MHL connection” (p.31). When connecting an HDMI-compatible playback device to the VIDEO AUX jack, use an HDMI cable. PREPARATIONS ➤ Input/output jacks and cables En 25 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 Connecting a TV Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV. You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit. To maximize the performance of the unit, we recommend connecting a TV with an HDMI cable. ■ HDMI connection Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable). • ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to the unit with a single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit. • When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC. ■ Component/composite video connection When connecting any video device with a component video cable, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks. When connecting any video device with a video pin cable, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack. • You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.28). The unit (rear) About Audio Return Channel (ARC) HDMI OUT jack HDMI OUT 2 1 (ZONE OUT) HDMI input ARC HDMI • If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to the TV. • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. HDMI HDMI • If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box, you do not need to make an audio cable connection between the TV and the unit. AUDIO AUDIO 1 (2 TV) L L L R R R TV 5 OPTICAL OPTICAL O AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks O Audio output (digital optical or analog stereo) • You do not make an audio cable connection between the TV and the unit in the following cases: – If your TV supports Audio Return Channel (ARC) – If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box • If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s power and volume with the TV’s remote control. To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit. For details on the settings, see “Information on HDMI” (p.147). PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 26 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable) MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks The unit (rear) MONITOR OUT Y PB PR ❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable) The unit (rear) MONITOR OUT Video input (composite video) PR VIDEO ZONE OUT PB Video input (component video) Y V V COMPONENT VIDEO PR Y PB PR AUDIO AUDIO 1 (2 TV) L PB L L R R Y R AUDIO AUDIO 1 (2 TV) TV L L L R R 5 OPTICAL OPTICAL R O O TV 5 OPTICAL OPTICAL O AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks O AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks Audio output (digital optical or analog stereo) Audio output (digital optical or analog stereo) PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 27 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ Connecting another TV or a projector HDMI The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching videos with the remote control (p.54). The unit (rear) (ZONE OUT) The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages. • Connecting an iPod (p.70) HDMI OUT 2 jack HDMI OUT 2 3 Connecting playback devices • Connecting a USB storage device (p.73) 1 ARC TV Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack. HDMI HDMI input HDMI • Videos input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to a TV connected to the unit with a cable other than HDMI. For details, refer to “Video signal flow” (p.146). TV (already connected) Projector • HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack. • If you set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2”, you can connect a video monitor for Zone2 to the HDMI OUT 2 jack and enjoy videos and audio using the video monitor (p.88). • The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment” setting (p.123) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (A , B , C ), COAXIAL (a, b, f) and OPTICAL (c, d, e) jacks to another input source. • If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.99) in the “Option” menu. ■ HDMI connection Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable. The unit (rear) HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks HDMI output HDMI HDMI HDMI Video device If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–7 on the remote control, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 28 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ Component video connection ■ Composite video connection Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable (digital coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device. Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device. Output jacks on video device Output jacks on video device Input jacks on the unit Video Audio Component video Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL) Digital optical AV 3 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL) Analog stereo AV 1–3 (COMPONENT VIDEO + AUDIO) AV 1–3 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks Y The unit (rear) PB Input jacks on the unit Video PR Audio Composite video Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (VIDEO + COAXIAL) Digital optical AV 3–4 (VIDEO + OPTICAL) Analog stereo AV 1–4 (VIDEO + AUDIO) The unit (rear) AV 1–4 (VIDEO) jacks PR Video output (composite video) PB Y V VIDEO Video output (component video) PR Y PB V PR PB C C Y COAXIAL O C C L COAXIAL O Video device Video device O L L R R OPTICAL O R L L L R R OPTICAL R Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL), AV 3 (OPTICAL), AV 1–3 (AUDIO) jacks Audio output (any of digital coaxial, digital optical, analog stereo) Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL), AV 3–4 (OPTICAL), AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks Audio output (any of digital coaxial, digital optical, analog stereo) If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–3 on the remote control, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 29 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) PHONO jacks PHONO Connect audio devices such as CD players, MD players, and a turntable to the unit. Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following connections. • The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment” setting (p.123) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COAXIAL (a, b, f) and OPTICAL (c, d, e) jacks to another input source. Audio output (PHONO) Ground lead GND The unit (rear) GND PHONO L L L L R R R R Turntable • If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.99) in the “Option” menu. Audio output jacks on audio device Audio output jacks on the unit Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (COAXIAL) AUDIO 2 (COAXIAL) Digital optical AV 3–4 (OPTICAL) AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL) C COAXIAL O Analog stereo Turntable (PHONO) C Audio device O AV 1–4 (AUDIO) AUDIO 1–4 (AUDIO) L L L R R PHONO OPTICAL R Any of AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4 (COAXIAL, OPTICAL, AUDIO) jacks Audio output (any of digital coaxial, digital optical, analog stereo) If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4 or PHONO on the remote control, the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit. When connecting a turntable • The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer. • Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Connecting to the jacks on the front panel Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect a playback device to the unit. Use the USB jack to connect an iPod or a USB storage device. For details, see “Connecting an iPod” (p.70) or “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.73). ❑ MHL connection Connect an MHL-compatible mobile device (such as smartphones) to the unit with an MHL cable. You can enjoy full HD videos and multichannel audio sources stored on the mobile device. The VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack of the unit enables you to input videos and audio directly from the mobile device to the unit. Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on the unit. MULTI ZONE PROGRAM FM AM TUNING ENTER ZONE 2 ❑ HDMI connection RETURN PHONES VIDEO AUX SILENT CINEMA YPAO MIC Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with an HDMI cable. MULTI ZONE PROGRAM FM AM ZONE 2 5V 2.1A VIDEO L AUDIO HDMI/ MHL 5V 1A R MHL TUNING The unit (front) ENTER RETURN ZONE CONTROL DISPLAY ZONE CONTROL DISPLAY PHONES VIDEO AUX SILENT CINEMA YPAO MIC 5V 2.1A VIDEO L AUDIO R HDMI/ MHL 5V 1A MHL output HDMI The unit (front) MHL Mobile device If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played back on the mobile device will be output from the unit. Game console • To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the unit (p.26). • You need to prepare an MHL cable that matches the jack on your mobile device. • If you cannot hear sounds played on the mobile device, check the volume of the mobile device. Camcorder If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX on the remote control, the video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit. • You can operate the mobile device using the menu operation keys, external device operation keys and numeric keys on the remote control. However, some features may not be compatible, depending on the mobile device or its application. In this case, operate the mobile device itself. • If “Standby Through” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, you can output mobile device videos/audio to the TV or operate the mobile device using the remote control of the unit even when the unit is in standby mode. • To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the unit (p.26). • You need to prepare an HDMI cable that matches the output jacks on your device. • The unit supplies power to the mobile device in the following conditions. – The unit is turned on. – The unit is in standby mode while “Standby Through” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”. • When “USB” is selected as the input source, video signals input to the VIDEO AUX jacks are output from the HDMI OUT and MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jacks by default. You can change the video out setting in “Video Out” (p.99) in the “Option” menu. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ❑ Composite video/analog stereo connection Connect a playback device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with a video pin cable and a stereo pin cable. MULTI ZONE PROGRAM FM AM TUNING ENTER ZONE 2 RETURN ZONE CONTROL DISPLAY PHONES VIDEO AUX SILENT CINEMA YPAO MIC 5V 2.1A VIDEO L V L AUDIO R HDMI/ MHL 5V 1A R The unit (front) Game console Camcorder If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit. • If you connect video devices to both the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack and VIDEO AUX (VIDEO/AUDIO) jacks, the unit outputs video/audio input through the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 32 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit. Assembling the AM antenna Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface. • The location of the antenna jacks varies depending on the region of purchase. FM antenna AM antenna Connecting the AM antenna Hold down The unit (rear) Insert Release • Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit. • The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the FM/AM antennas En 33 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 5 Connecting a network cable or the wireless antenna Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or connect the supplied wireless antenna for establishing a wireless network connection. Connecting the wireless antenna You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit. Connect the supplied wireless antenna to the unit for establishing a wireless network connection. For information on how to connect the unit to a network device wirelessly, see “Connecting to a network device wirelessly” (p.46). Connecting the network cable Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable). Internet Network Attached Storage (NAS) WAN b ESS WIREL LAN a Modem PC a Rotate the antenna clockwise. Network cable Router b Stand the antenna up straight. The unit (rear) Mobile device (such as iPod touch and iPhone) • Do not connect the antenna other than the supplied one. • Do not apply excessive force on the antenna. Doing so may damage it. • When packing the unit, remove the antenna to prevent damage. • If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit, as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network parameters manually (p.119). • You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.127) in the “Information” menu. • Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router) may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the security software or firewall settings appropriately. • Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit. • To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a network cable or the wireless antenna En 34 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 6 Connecting other devices Connecting recording devices Connecting a device with analog multi-channel output You can connect video/audio recording devices to the AV OUT jacks. These jacks output video/audio signals selected as the input. You can connect an analog multi-channel output device such as a DVD player and an SACD player to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. The unit (rear) • The AV OUT jacks cannot output video/audio signals input through the HDMI or COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. • Be sure to use the AV OUT jacks only for connecting recording devices. AV OUT jacks The unit (rear) AV OUT Video/audio input VIDEO V MULTI CH INPUT Channel output (Center) CENTER V (Subwoofer) AUDIO L L R R L R Video/audio recording device FRONT MULTI CH INPUT jacks SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER L (Surround back) R OPTICAL O L (Surround) Device with analog multi-channel output O R L (Front) R If you select “MULTI CH” as the input source by pressing MULTI on the remote control, the audio played back on the device will be output from the unit. • You can select a video source to be displayed when “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source using “Video Out” (p.99) in the “Option” menu. When connecting a video device (such as a DVD player) to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks, use the input jack specified in “Video Out” for the video connection. • Since the unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers, make appropriate settings on the external device (such as a DVD player) that suit to the speaker configuration. • When “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source, sound mode selection and tone control adjustment are not available. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting other devices En 35 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the unit (such as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the trigger function by connecting the external device to one of the TRIGGER OUT jacks. 7 Connecting the power cable Before connecting the power cable (General model only) Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage. Voltages are AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz. TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks The unit (rear) • Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC wall outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a potential fire hazard. TRIGGER OUT 1 The unit (rear) VOLTAGE SELECTOR 2 12V 0.1AMAX. TOTAL VOLTAGE SELECTOR System connection input 220V240V 110V120V Yamaha subwoofer that supports a system connection • You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output1” and “Trigger Output2” (p.124) in the “Setup” menu. After all the connections are complete, connect the supplied power cable to the unit and then to an AC wall outlet. The unit (rear) To an AC wall outlet PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the power cable En 36 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 z 8 Selecting an on-screen menu language AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX Select the desired on-screen menu language from English (default), Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET TUNER MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN 1 2 Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. 3 4 Press ON SCREEN. 5 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired language. OPTION Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). 6 7 To confirm the setting, press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. • The information on the front display is provided in English only. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 PREPARATIONS ➤ Selecting an on-screen menu language En 37 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 z 9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room. 4 For the basic speaker configuration (p.16): set to “Basic” (default). SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION For any of the advanced speaker configurations (p.20): set to the appropriate setting. • The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control) technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically designed for acoustic perfection. 5 VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM According to your speaker configuration, configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.111) in the “Setup” menu. • Note the following regarding YPAO measurement. – Test tones are output at high volume and may surprise or frighten small children. Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position and connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel. – Test tone volume cannot be adjusted. ENTER – Keep the room as quiet as possible. RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT • Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can use the tripod screws to stabilize the microphone. – Do not connect headphones. PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE – Stay in a corner of the room behind the listening position so that you do not become an obstacle between speakers and the YPAO microphone. 1 2 Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. 3 Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to maximum. YPAO MIC jack The unit (front) YPAO MIC Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). 1 9 VOLUME CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT MAX MIN 3 9 4 MIN 2 MAX YPAO 5 microphone Ear height PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 38 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 The following screen appears on the TV. • If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to enjoy surround sound in a wider space. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET • If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening position you will be seated most frequently. AUDIO Single measure Multi measure (5 listening positions) TUNER MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU • To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting the measurement. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 6 OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY If desired, change the measuring method (multi/single). d e bac a Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” and press ENTER. b Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER. Multi measure Multi measure (1 listening position + front/back/left/right) (2 listening positions + front/back) BAND MODE TUNING a PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 b c a e d c a b d Settings Yes Select this option if you will have several listening positions or if you want others to enjoy surround sound. You can take measurements at up to 8 different positions in the room. The speaker settings will be optimized to suit the area defined by those positions (multi measure). No (default) Select this option if your listening position will always be fixed. Take the measurements at only one position. The speaker settings will be optimized to suit that position (single measure). This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the measurement. When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”: “Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)” (p.41) When “Multi Position” is set to “No”: “Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.40) PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 39 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Measuring at one listening position (single measure) AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT TUNER ZONE 2 1 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Measure” and press ENTER. The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the measurement immediately. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM To save the measurement results, use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER. When “Multi Position” is set to “No”, follow the procedure below for measurement. It takes about 3 minutes to perform the measurement. AUDIO MAIN 3 The adjusted speaker settings are applied. TOP MENU • To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement finishes. OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER RETURN • To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”. 4 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO” to enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER. BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 • If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see “Error messages” (p.44) or “Warning messages” (p.45). • To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see “Checking the measurement results” (p.43). 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and press ENTER. PREPARATIONS ➤ • If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural sounds even at low volume. • You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.97) in the “Option” menu. Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. This completes optimization of the speaker settings. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT Caution • The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on top of AV equipment). TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU 1 VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below for measurement. It takes about 10 minutes to measure 8 listening positions. • If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see “Error messages” (p.44) or “Warning messages” (p.45). SCENE 1 Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the measurement immediately. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Measure” and press ENTER. OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER RETURN • To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN. The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement at the first position finishes. BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 2 Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening position and press ENTER. Repeat step 2 until measurements at all listening positions (up to 8) have been taken. PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 41 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT AUDIO When the measurements at the positions you want to measure are completed, use the cursor keys to select “CANCEL” and press ENTER. 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO” to enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER. When you have taken measurements at 8 listening positions, the following screen appears automatically. TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN • If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural sounds even at low volume. OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET 4 Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and press ENTER. 5 To save the measurement result, use the cursor keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT • You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.97) in the “Option” menu. • To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see “Checking the measurement results” (p.43). 7 Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. This completes optimization of the speaker settings. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 4 Caution • The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on top of AV equipment). The adjusted speaker settings are applied. • To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”. PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 42 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Checking the measurement results Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments You can check the YPAO measurement results. When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings and reload the previous YPAO adjustments. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT 1 AUDIO After the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Result” and press ENTER. TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 • You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.109) in the “Setup” menu, which displays the previous measurement results. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto Setup”, and then “Result” (p.108). 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and press ENTER. 3 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM The following screen appears. 1 POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN 1 OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY 2 Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 3 BAND MODE TUNING PRESET 1 Measurement result items SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 2 Measurement result details ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 The number of measured positions (when multi measure is performed) 2 3 Use the cursor keys to select an item. Wiring Polarity of each speaker Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity (+/-). Size Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the subwoofer) Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. Distance Distance from the listening position to each speaker Level Output level adjustment for each speaker To finish checking the results and return to the previous screen, press RETURN. PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 43 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Error messages If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again. Error message Cause E-1:No Front SP Front speakers are not detected. E-2:No Sur. SP One of the surround speakers cannot be detected. E-3:No F.PRNS SP One of the front presence speakers cannot be detected. E-4:SBR → SBL A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only. When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speaker. E-5:Noisy The noise is too loud. Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select “PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected. E-6:Check Sur. Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround speakers are connected. Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speakers. E-7:No MIC The YPAO microphone has been removed. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. E-8:No Signal The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. E-9:User Cancel The measurement has been canceled. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”. An internal error has occurred. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. E-10:Internal Err. Remedy Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections. PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 44 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Warning messages If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions. However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings. Warning message Cause Remedy W-1:Out of Phase A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity (+/-). Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.43) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by “Reverse”. If the speaker is connected incorrectly: Turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable. If the speaker is connected correctly: Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message. W-2:Over Distance A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening position. Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.43) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m (80 ft) of the listening position. W-3:Level Error There are significant volume differences between the speakers. Select “Level” in “Result” (p.43) and check the speaker identified by “Over ±10.0dB”, then check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as possible. PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 45 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a wireless connection. ■ Connecting without a wireless router (access point) Connect a mobile device to the unit directly. You can use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” to control the unit from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on the unit. Selecting the connection method Select a connection method according to your network environment. ■ Connecting with a wireless router (access point) Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point). You can enjoy Internet radio, AirPlay, or music files stored on media servers (PC/NAS) on the unit. The unit Mobile device (such as iPhone) Internet For details on connection, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct)” (p.52). Wireless router • You cannot use Wireless Direct simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection (p.34) or the wireless network connection (p.47). Modem • When Wireless Direct is enabled, the following functions are not available. – Internet radio – Network services – Playback of music stored on media servers (PC/NAS) Mobile device (such as iPhone) The unit • For details on “AV CONTROLLER”, visit the Yamaha website. For details on connection, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.47). • You cannot use the wireless network connection simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection (p.34) or Wireless Direct (p.52). • If the unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart, the unit may not connect to a wireless router (access point). In such case, place them close to each other. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network device wirelessly En 46 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Connecting the unit to a wireless network AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT There are several methods to connect the unit to a wireless network. AUDIO Select a connection method according to your environment. Do you own iOS devices (iPhone/iPad/iPod touch)? TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 Yes A (p.47) SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU Does your wireless router (access point) has a WPS button? VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM No POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 5 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”. 7 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and press ENTER. Yes B (p.48) No Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER 4 C (p.49) DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 4 ■ A: Sharing the iOS device setting You can easily setup a wireless connection by applying the connection settings on iOS devices (iPhone/iPad/iPod touch). Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a wireless router. • The checkmark indicates the current setting. 8 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Share Wi-Fi Settings (iOS)” and select “NEXT”. • You need iOS device with iOS 5.0 or later. For details on supported devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.145). 1 2 Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. 3 Press ON SCREEN. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network device wirelessly En 47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 9 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX Connect the iOS device to the USB jack, and disable the screen lock on the iOS device. You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the WPS button. The unit (front) AUDIO ZONE 2 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT ■ B: Using the WPS push button configuration RETURN ZONE CONTROL DISPLAY PHONES VIDEO AUX SILENT CINEMA YPAO MIC 5V 2.1A VIDEO L AUDIO R • This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router (access point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method. TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN 10 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “NEXT” and 1 2 Cursor keys ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING 11 Tap “Allow” in the message appeared on the iOS device. When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 12 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Hold down INFO (WPS) on the front panel for 3 seconds. “Press WPS button on Access Point” appears on the front display. press ENTER. OPTION ENTER Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. 3 Push the WPS button on the wireless router (access point). When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the front display. If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another connection method. 4 About WPS WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network device wirelessly En 48 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ C: Using other connection methods If your wireless router (access point) does not support WPS push button configuration method, follow the procedure below to configure the wireless network settings. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT AUDIO 1 2 TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). 3 4 Press ON SCREEN. 5 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 9 ON SCREEN OPTION 3 4 6 7 8 0 MEMORY ENT 7 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the desired connection method and select “NEXT”. Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM 8 The following connection methods are available. WPS Button You can set up a wireless connection with the WPS button while viewing the TV screen. Follow the instructions displayed on the TV screen. Share Wi-Fi Settings (iOS) See “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.47). Access Point Scan You can set up a wireless connection by searching for an access point. For details on settings, see “Searching for an access point” (p.50). Manual Setting You can setup a wireless connection by entering the required information (such as SSID) manually. For details on settings, see “Setting up the wireless connection manually” (p.50). PIN Code You can set up a wireless connection by entering the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access point). The method is available if the wireless router (access point) supports the WPS PIN code method. For details on settings, see “Using the PIN code” (p.51). Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and press ENTER. Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”. • The checkmark indicates the current setting. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network device wirelessly En 49 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT ❑ Searching for an access point ❑ Setting up the wireless connection manually If you select “Access Point Scan” as the connection method, the unit starts searching for access points. After a while, the list of available access points appears on the TV screen. If you select “Manual Setting” as the connection method, the wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV. AUDIO 1 TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 1 2 3 4 TV NET RADIO TOP MENU Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of the access point and select “NEXT”. 2 2 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the security method of the access point and select “NEXT”. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key and select “NEXT”. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM 1 The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV. SCENE BD/DVD Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired access point and select “NEXT”. You need to setup the SSID (network name), encryption method and security key for your network. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 3 4 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and press ENTER to start the connection process. When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another connection method. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Settings None, WEP, WPA-PSK (TKIP), WPA-PSK (AES), WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network device wirelessly En 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT If you select “None” in Step 2, this setting is not available. Proceed to Step 4. AUDIO ZONE 2 If you select other method, enter either 8 to 63 character string, or 64 hexadecimal digits. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU If you select “PIN Code” as the connection method, the list of available access points appears on the TV screen. 1 POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 2 3 ON SCREEN Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and press ENTER to start the connection process. When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the wireless router (access point). OPTION ENTER Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired access point and select “NEXT”. The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM ❑ Using the PIN code If you select “WEP”, enter either 5 or 13 character string, or 10 or 26 hexadecimal digits. TUNER MAIN Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key and select “NEXT”. DISPLAY If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another connection method. BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 4 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and press ENTER to start the connection process. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. 4 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is entered correctly, and repeat from Step 1. 5 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network device wirelessly En 51 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT 7 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless Direct” and select “OK”. Follow the procedure below to connect a mobile device to the unit directly. AUDIO TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 • Wireless Direct connection may be insecure since the communication is not strongly encrypted. The unit may operate by playback operation on wireless devices connected to the unit without permission. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU 1 2 VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). • The checkmark indicates the current setting. OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. 8 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the desired security method and select “NEXT”. DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 3 4 Press ON SCREEN. 5 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and press ENTER. Settings None, WEP • If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the communication is not encrypted. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network device wirelessly En 52 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 9 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key and select “NEXT”. If you select “None” in Step 8, this setting is not available. Proceed to Step 10. AUDIO Otherwise, enter either 5 or 13 character string. TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 1 2 3 4 TV NET RADIO TOP MENU a Enable the Wi-Fi function on the mobile device. b Select the SSID displayed in Step 10 from the list of available access points. 12 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM For details on settings of your mobile device, refer to the instruction manual of the mobile device. c When you are prompted for a password, enter the security key displayed in Step 10. SCENE BD/DVD 11 Configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING 10 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “OK” and press ENTER to save the setting. The settings made appear on the TV screen. PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 The SSID and security key information is required for setup of a mobile device. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network device wirelessly En 53 PLAYBACK AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT AUDIO Input selection keys TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 Basic playback procedure 1 Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or BD/DVD player) connected to the unit. 2 Use the input selection keys to select an input source. 3 Start playback on the external device or select a radio station. HDMI OUT SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU MUTE VOLUME ON SCREEN Selecting an HDMI output jack 1 Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack. Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be used for signal output changes. DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 ON SCREEN For details on the following operations, see the corresponding pages. Cursor keys ENTER RETURN DISPLAY • Listening to FM/AM radio (p.63) BAND MODE TUNING • Playing back iPod music (p.70) PRESET • Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.73) SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 9 MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Refer to the instruction manual for the external device. OPTION ENTER HDMIOUTSel. OUT1+2 • Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.76) Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 jacks. OUT 1 Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack. OUT 2 Off Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks. • You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.55). • Playing back music with AirPlay (p.83) • When “OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest resolution supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For example, if you have connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, the unit outputs 720p video signals.) Press VOLUME to adjust the volume. • If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 (“HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.122)), you can turn on/off each zone by pressing HDMI OUT repeatedly. • Listening to Internet radio (p.80) 4 OUT 1+2 • To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute. • To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or TONE/BALANCE on the front panel (p.97). On-screen input selection a Press ON SCREEN. b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER. c Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and press ENTER. PLAYBACK ➤ Basic playback procedure En 54 Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, HDMI output and various settings with just one touch. You can use up to 12 scenes to register your favorite settings and switch them depending on a playback source. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT 1 TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO SCENE Press SCENE. The input source and settings registered to the corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on automatically when it is in standby mode. By default, the following settings are registered for each scene. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM SCENE (SCENE key) TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER RETURN HDMI Output DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING 2 (TV) 3 (NET) 4 (RADIO) Input (p.54) AV 1 AUDIO 1 NET RADIO TUNER Audio Select (p.99) Auto Auto — — HDMI Output (p.54) OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 Sound Program (p.57) Sci-Fi STRAIGHT 7ch Stereo 7ch Stereo Pure Direct Mode (p.115) Auto Auto Auto Auto Enhancer (p.62) Off On On On Input OPTION ENTER 1 (BD/DVD) Mode PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 9 • You can select SCENE 1–4 by pressing SCENE on the remote control. Additionally, you can create 8 scenes (SCENE 5–12) and select those scenes from the “Scene” menu (p.102). On-screen scene selection a Press ON SCREEN. b Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER. c Use the cursor keys to select a desired scene and press ENTER. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) En 55 Configuring scene assignments AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU 1 Set the unit to the condition (such as input source and sound program) that you want to assign to a scene. 2 Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front display. SCENE DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 SCENE1 SETComplete MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING • The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external device connected to the unit via HDMI. To enable SCENE link playback, specify the device type in “Device Control” (p.103) in the “Scene” menu. Selecting setting items to be included as scene assignments In addition to the default scene assignments (Input, HDMI Output and Mode), you can also include the following setting items as the scene assignments in “Detail” (p.103) in the “Scene” menu. Sound Tone Control, YPAO Volume, Adaptive DRC, Extra Bass Surround CINEMA DSP 3D Mode, Dialogue Lift, Dialogue Level, Subwoofer Trim, Extended Surround Video Video Mode Volume Master Volume Lipsync Lipsync, Delay Speaker Setup Setting Pattern, PEQ Select • (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only) To control your playback device after selecting a scene with the remote control of the unit, change the external device assigned to the SCENE keys. For details, refer to “Supplement for Remote Control” in the supplied CD-ROM. PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) En 56 Selecting the sound mode AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo playback). AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 ❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for movies • Press MOVIE repeatedly. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN PROGRAM ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER RETURN PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 3 4 b Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press ENTER. c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround decoder and press ENTER. MOVIE MUSIC SUR.DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT • You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing PROGRAM. • You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in the “Sound Program” menu (p.104). • Press MUSIC repeatedly. • The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source. This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening music sources or stereo playback (p.59). • When you play back audio signals with a sampling rate of higher than 96 kHz, the straight decode mode (p.61) is automatically selected. ❑ Selecting a surround decoder BAND MOVIE ❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for music or stereo playback DISPLAY MODE TUNING a Press ON SCREEN. This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games (p.58). OPTION ENTER On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection • You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.10) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in the “Information” menu (p.126). • Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly. This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from 2-channel sources (p.61). ❑ Switching to the straight decode mode • Press STRAIGHT. This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels (p.61). ❑ Switching to the Pure Direct mode • Press PURE DIRECT. This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the electrical noise from other circuitry (p.62). ❑ Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer • Press ENHANCER. This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth and breadth (p.62). PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 57 Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) ■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE) The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games. The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP technology (CINEMA DSP 3D). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual movie theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound fields. ❑ MOVIE THEATER Standard This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio, such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right, and rear. Spectacle This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms. Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music. Adventure This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides, powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation of the sounds and the separation of the channels. Drama This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for long periods. Mono Movie This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies, in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate reverberation to the original audio. Sound program category MUSIC DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP 3 CLASSICAL HallinVienna MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR “CINEMA DSP n” lights up Sound program • To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.115) in the “Setup” menu to “Off”. • We recommend using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the stereoscopic sound fields. However, even when no front presence speakers are connected, the unit creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce stereoscopic sound fields. When VPS is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 58 ❑ ENTERTAINMENT Sports This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’ voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of the fans in a suitable space. Action Game This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field. Roleplaying Game This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field. Music Video This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall. ■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback (MUSIC) The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources. You can also select stereo playback. ❑ CLASSICAL Hall in Munich This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500 seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena. Hall in Vienna This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound. Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music. ❑ LIVE/CLUB Cellar Club This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small stage. The Roxy Theatre This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. The Bottom Line This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. ❑ STEREO 2ch Stereo Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP). 7ch Stereo Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties. • CINEMA DSP 3D (p.58) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.60) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo” is selected. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 59 ■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) when no surround speakers are connected, the unit utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround technology to reproduce up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the well-oriented sound field only with the front-side speakers. We recommend using presence speakers in order to enjoy more effective stereoscopic sound field. • When Virtual CINEMA DSP is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display. ■ Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your room, you can place them in the front (p.17) and enjoy multi-channel surround sound using Virtual CINEMA FRONT. When “Layout (Surround)” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, the unit creates the virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound with the 5 speakers placed in the front. • When Virtual CINEMA FRONT is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display. ■ Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with stereo headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound program or a surround decoder. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 60 Enjoying unprocessed playback AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX You can play back input sources without any sound field effect processing. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT ■ Playing back in original channels (straight decode) TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for multichannel sources. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU 1 POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Press STRAIGHT. For details on each decoder see “Glossary” (p.142). 1 Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder. Each time you press the key, the surround decoder changes. HD 3 Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is enabled or disabled. OPTION The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel playback from 2-channel sources. When a multichannel source is input, it works the same way as the straight decode mode. DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM ■ Playing back 2-channel sources in multichannel (surround decoder) SUR.DECODE ProLogic bPro Logic ENTER RETURN DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP DISPLAY HD 3 STRAIGHT MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR BAND MODE TUNING bPLII Music SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 4 bPLII Movie bPLIIx Music SUR.DECODE PRESET bPLIIx Movie MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Uses the Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all sources. Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic II decoder) suitable for movies. Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic II decoder) suitable for music. • To enable 6.1/7.1-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround back speakers are used, set “Extended Surround” (p.116) in the “Setup” menu to a setting other than “Off”. bPLIIx Game Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic II decoder) suitable for games. • If “Layout (Surround)” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, Virtual CINEMA FRONT (p.60) works when multi-channel source is played back. bPLII Game Neo:6 Cinema Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for movies. Neo:6 Music Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for music. • You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are connected or when “Surround Back” (p.112) in the “Setup” menu is set to “None”. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 61 Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality. AUDIO 1 TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 Each time you press the key, the Pure Direct mode is enabled or disabled. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM Press PURE DIRECT. HD TOP MENU PUREDIRECT 3 MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along with any other sound modes. 1 POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION EnhancerOn • When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the following functions are not available. ENTER Press ENHANCER. Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer is enabled or disabled. PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR RETURN DISPLAY – Operating the on-screen menu and some items in the “Option” menu BAND – Using the multi-zone function MODE TUNING PRESET L C R SW SR SBL SB SBR “ENHANCER” lights up – Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation) MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SL – Output from the AV OUT jacks SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE VOLUME ENHANCER – Some settings for the speakers or sound programs PURE DIRECT SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT • Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz. ENHANCER • You can also use “Enhancer” (p.98) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 62 Listening to FM/AM radio AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting from registered radio stations. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET TUNER TUNER MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO • If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM antennas. 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM). DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP Setting the frequency steps VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM • The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used in U.K. and Europe models. Selecting a frequency for reception FM87.50MHz MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR HD 3 (Asia and General models only) TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and 9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM. OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND BAND MODE TUNING PRESET TUNING 1 2 SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT Set the unit to standby mode. When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z. MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT 3 Use the following keys to set a frequency. TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the key for about a second to search stations automatically. Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT). FM98.50MHz STEREO TUNED VOLUME SL L C R SW SR SBL SB SBR 4 “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. Numeric keys “STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received. PROGRAM 3 Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TUNER FRQ STEP”. DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP HD 3 4 5 TUNERFRQSTEP FM50/AM9 Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”. Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again. • “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of reception range. • (U.S.A. model only) You can switch between “Auto” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio reception in “Audio Mode” (p.99) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it. (HD Radio programs are not available when the unit is in the monaural reception mode.) • (Except for U.S.A. model) You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio reception in “FM Mode” (p.99) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 63 Registering favorite radio stations (presets) AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their preset numbers. AUDIO TUNER TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 • You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals and HD Radio stations (U.S.A. model only) by using “Auto Preset” (p.67, p.69). SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number. TOP MENU 1 POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number. 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio station. You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once. ■ Registering a radio station VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM ■ Selecting a preset station Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.63) to tune into the desired radio station. Preset STEREO TUNED 01:FM98.50MHz VOLUME SL L C R SW SR SBL SB SBR OPTION • “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered. ENTER RETURN • (U.S.A. model only) To register a specific HD Radio program, select an audio program (p.65) after tuning into the radio station. DISPLAY BAND • “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered. • “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered. MODE TUNING PRESET PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 4 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT Numeric keys MEMORY 2 Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds. • To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.67, p.69). The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most recently registered number. Preset number Preset STEREO TUNED 01:FM98.50MHz PresetOK VOLUME SL L C R SW SR SBL SB SBR • To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired radio station, use PRESET or numeric keys to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again. “Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered Preset STEREO TUNED 01:Empty FM98.50MHz VOLUME SL L C R SW SR SBL SB SBR PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 64 HD Radio™ tuning ■ Selecting an HD Radio™ audio program (U.S.A. model only) You can select an audio program when the unit is tuned into an HD Radio station that provides multiple audio programs (up to 8). AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT HD Radio Technology is a new technology that enables FM/AM radio stations to broadcast programs digitally. Digital broadcasting provides listeners with radically improved audio quality and reception as well as new data services. Furthermore, supplemental program services allow listeners to select from up to 8 HD Radio programs multicast on a single FM HD Radio channel. For further information on HD Radio Technology, visit “http://www.ibiquity.com/”. AUDIO TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU The unit is equipped with an HD Radio reception feature, facilitating CD quality FM broadcasts as well as analog FM stereo quality AM broadcasts. In addition, the unit can receive both audio and data (such as song titles, artist names, album titles and program types) from all HD Radio programs (HD1 to HD8). VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION RETURN BAND MODE TUNING Program Service Data: Contributes to the superior user experience PRESET SLEEP HD TUNED FM88.9MHz3 WXYZ-FM VOLUME SL L C R SW SR SBR SBL ■ Displaying the HD Radio™ information These HD2/HD3 Channels provide new, original music as well as deep cuts into traditional genre. INFO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 MEMORY ENT Press INFO. Each time you press the key, the item switches. Adjacent to traditional main stations are extra local FM channels. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 9 HD2/3 of HD RadioTechnology. Presents song name, artist, station IDs, HD2/HD3 Channel Guide, and other relevant data streams. TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MUSIC You can also enter an audio program number (1 to 8) directly by using the numeric keys. For example, to select program 3, press 3 and then ENT (or just leave it). 1 DISPLAY MODE INFO Press MODE repeatedly to select a desired audio program. You can switch the HD Radio information displayed on the front display. ENTER MOVIE 1 HD TUNED Digital, CD-quality sound. HD Radio Technology enables local radio Info Category stations to broadcast a clean digital signal. AM sounds like today’s FM and FM sounds like a CD. Numeric keys ENT VOLUME SL L C R SW SR SBR SBL Item name About 3 seconds later, the information is displayed. When tuning into an HD Radio station FM88.9-1 Relative/total program number (when multiple programs are available) HD1/3 HD TUNED FM88.9MHz1 WXYZ-FM “HD” lights up HD TUNED WXYZ-FM RhythmandBlu VOLUME SL L C R SW SR SBR SBL Station Info Frequency, station name (call sign) Category Station name (call sign), program category Artist/Song Station name (call sign), artist name/song title Album Station name (call sign), album title DSP Program Frequency, sound program selected on the unit Audio Decoder Frequency, decoder selected on the unit VOLUME SL L C R SW SR SBR SBL Absolute program number (when multiple programs are available) • The unit is capable of receiving both hybrid and all-digital FM/AM radio stations. If you cannot search the desired all-digital HD Radio station by holding down TUNING, enter the frequency directly using the numeric keys. • When the unit is in the monaural reception mode (p.99), you can tune into the analog part of a hybrid HD Radio station only. • Some audio programs may not provide information depending on the station or period of time. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 65 ■ HD Radio™ operation on the TV AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT TUNER TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Tuning (+/-) Selects a frequency. Auto (+/-) Selects a radio station automatically. Program (+/-) Selects an audio program (when multiple audio programs are available). Memory Registers the selected station as presets. Direct Enters a frequency directly. Switches to FM/AM. AM Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. The playback screen is displayed on the TV. Manual Tuning TOP MENU 1 2 VOLUME MUTE POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 4 OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Browse Moves to the browse screen (preset station list). Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. 1 Radio station information MODE TUNING Function FM 3 PROGRAM Submenu ❑ Playback screen SCENE 1 Menu You can view the HD Radio information or select a radio station on the TV. PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected band (FM/AM) and frequency. When tuning into an HD Radio station, the selected audio program number and HD Radio information (station name [call sign], program category, artist name, album name and song title) are also displayed. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. 2 HD indicator Lights up when an HD Radio station signal is received. 3 TUNED/STEREO indicators “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. “STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received. 4 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 66 ■ Browse screen Radio Data System tuning AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT (U.K. and Europe models only) 1 AUDIO 3 TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO ■ Displaying the Radio Data System information 1 Preset station list VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset station and press ENTER to tune into it. OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. Menu Submenu Function Memory Registers the current station to the preset number selected in the list. MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 9 2 Press INFO. Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station. • We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (p.69). 3 Operation menu Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN MODE TUNING 1 2 Preset number POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station. STEREO TUNED INFO 3 Auto Preset Automatically registers HD Radio (FM/AM) stations and FM radio stations with strong signals (up to 40 stations). Clear Preset Clear the preset station selected in the list. Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations. 4 6 7 8 0 MEMORY ENT Utility Info ProgramType VOLUME SL L C R SW SR SBR SBL Item name About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. Frequency (always displayed) 1 Page Up 1 Page Down Moves to the previous/next page of the list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • If HD Radio stations are detected by “Auto Preset”, only the audio program 1 (HD1) will be registered. If you want to register a specific HD Radio program, register it manually (p.64). STEREO TUNED FM98.50MHz CLASSICS VOLUME SL L C R SW SR SBR SBL Information Program Service Program service name Program Type Current program type Radio Text Information on the current program Clock Time Current time DSP Program Sound mode name Audio Decoder Decoder name PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 67 Operating the radio on the TV • “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System service. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the TV. AUDIO TUNER TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function, follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU ■ Receiving traffic information automatically 1 When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program” (TrafficProgram) and press ENTER. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY OPTION Cursor keys ENTER RETURN The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the search immediately. • (U.S.A. model only) See “HD Radio™ operation on the TV” (p.66) to operate the radio on the TV. 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. The playback screen is displayed on the TV. ■ Playback screen 3 1 2 4 BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT • To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed. • To cancel the search, press RETURN. 3 4 6 7 8 0 MEMORY ENT • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. 9 The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the search finishes. Finished STEREO TUNED TrafficProgram TPFM101.30MHz VOLUME SL L C R SW SR SBR SBL Traffic information station (frequency) 1 Radio station information Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected band (FM/AM) and frequency. (U.K. and Europe models only) When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.67), the Radio Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”) is also displayed. 2 Band icon (Except for U.K. and Europe models) Select this icon and press ENTER to switch between FM and AM. • “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information stations are found. 3 TUNED/STEREO indicators “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. “STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received. 4 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 68 Menu AV 1 2 3 Submenu Function FM AM (U.K. and Europe models only) Switches to FM/AM. Tuning (+/-) Selects a frequency. Auto (+/-) Selects a radio station automatically. Memory Registers the selected station as presets. Direct Enters a frequency directly. 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT ■ Browse screen 1 AUDIO Manual Tuning TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU Browse Moves to the browse screen (preset station list). Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND 3 2 1 Preset station list Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset station and press ENTER to tune into it. 2 Preset number 3 Operation menu Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. Menu MODE TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE Submenu Function Memory Registers the current station to the preset number selected in the list. Auto Preset Automatically registers FM radio stations with strong signals (up to 40 stations). Clear Preset Clear the preset station selected in the list. Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations. PRESET MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 3 4 Utility 1 Page Up 1 Page Down Moves to the previous/next page of the list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • (U.K. and Europe models only) Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto Preset”. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 69 Playing back iPod music AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable supplied with the iPod. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT ZONE 2 Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start playback. USB • For details on playable iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.145). TUNER MAIN 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU Connecting an iPod POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the iPod. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen. 1 SCENE 1 Playback of iPod content Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 1 2 Connect the USB cable to the iPod. Connect the USB cable to the USB jack. The unit (front) BAND ON SCREEN OPTION TONE/BALANCE STRAIGHT MODE TUNING PRESET PROGRAM ENTER SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT RETURN MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT DISPLAY PHONES SILENT CINEMA ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 YPAO MIC 5V 4 • If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed. 2.1A 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. DOCK TAG HD IN OUT 1 OUT 2 PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP HD 3 USB Connected MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR • The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If “Network Standby” (p.119) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to charge without limit. • Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use. • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the simple play mode (p.72). PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 70 ■ Browse screen AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT ■ Playback screen 1 2 3 AUDIO 1 2 3 5 TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 4 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Status indicators VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.72) and playback status (such as play/pause). OPTION 3 Contents list ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. 4 Item number/total 5 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.72) and playback status (such as play/pause). 2 Playback information 2 List name POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 1 Status indicators Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. 3 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. Menu Function 1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list. 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. Play Control 10 Pages Down Submenu Function a Resumes playback from pause. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. f g Return Returns to the higher-level list. h Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. j Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. Skips forward/backward. Searches forward/backward (by holding down). Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • You can also use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control playback. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 71 ■ Operating the iPod itself or remote control (simple play) AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT 1 AUDIO ZONE 2 The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are enabled. 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again. 1 When “USB” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. Operate your iPod itself or the remote control to start playback. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. OPTION Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Cursor keys Select an item. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. ENTER Confirms the selection. • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. a BAND MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP MODE ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 MEMORY 9 • During simple play, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly on your iPod or press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below. Operational remote control Function keys POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings of your iPod. Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode. TUNER MAIN ■ Shuffle/repeat settings External device operation keys d Starts playback or stops playback temporarily. s Stops playback. f g h ENT j Skips forward/backward. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Item Shuffle (Shuffle) Searches forward/backward (by holding down). Repeat (Repeat) 4 Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. Songs (Songs) Plays back songs in random order. “x” appears in the TV screen. Albums (Albums) Plays back albums in random order. “x” appears in the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears in the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs repeatedly. “v” appears in the TV screen. To exit from the menu, press OPTION. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 72 Playing back music stored on a USB storage device AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on the unit. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT USB The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or FAT32 format). • Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack. • Connect a USB memory device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use extension cables. TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION Playback of USB storage device contents • For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.145). Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device contents and start playback. Connecting a USB storage device 1 You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed on the TV screen. Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack. 1 The unit (front) ENTER ON SCREEN RETURN OPTION Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. TONE/BALANCE STRAIGHT PROGRAM DISPLAY ENTER BAND RETURN DISPLAY PHONES MODE SILENT CINEMA TUNING YPAO MIC PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE 5V 2.1A MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 4 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT • If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is displayed. USB storage device DOCK TAG HD IN OUT 1 OUT 2 PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP HD 3 USB Connected MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR • If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 73 2 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT ■ Browse screen Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. 1 2 3 If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. AUDIO 5 TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 4 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Status indicators VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU 2 List name POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING 3 Contents list Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected. • If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during playback, playback stops automatically. 4 Item number/total 5 Operation menu PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.75) and playback status (such as play/pause). MUSIC Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT Menu Function 1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list. 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. 10 Pages Down Return Returns to the higher-level list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 74 ■ Playback screen AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT ■ Shuffle/repeat settings You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB storage device contents. 1 2 AUDIO 3 1 When “USB” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Status indicators VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND OPTION Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. 2 Playback information POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.75) and playback status (such as play/pause). 3 Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. Item 3 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. Menu ENHANCER PURE DIRECT Play Control Submenu Function a Resumes playback from pause. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. Shuffle (Shuffle) Repeat (Repeat) f g Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Skips forward/backward. Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. 4 Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. On (On) Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order. “x” appears on the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears on the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the TV screen. To exit from the menu, press OPTION. • You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control to control playback. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 75 Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit. • To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.34). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.127) in the “Information” menu. • The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired network connection. • For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.145). ❑ For Windows Media Player 11 1 2 3 Start Windows Media Player 11 on your PC. 4 Click “OK” to exit. Select “Library”, then “Media Sharing”. Check the “Share my media to” box, select the unit’s icon, and click “Allow”. Media sharing setup To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to configure the media sharing setting on each music server. ■ For a PC with Windows Media Player installed ❑ For Windows Media Player 12 1 2 3 4 Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC. 5 Click “OK” to exit. • For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help. ■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software installed Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media sharing settings. Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”. Click “Turn on media streaming”. Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s model name. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 76 Playback of PC music contents 3 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and start playback. AUDIO NET 1 TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV screen. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. Cursor keys ENTER RETURN • Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected. • If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during playback, playback stops automatically. BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP • If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the playback screen is displayed. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 4 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 2 Use the cursor keys to select a music server and press ENTER. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 77 ■ Browse screen AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT ■ Playback screen 1 2 3 AUDIO 1 2 3 5 TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 4 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Status indicators 1 Status indicators VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.79) and playback status (such as play/pause). 3 Contents list RETURN DISPLAY BAND Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 9 Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. OPTION ENTER MOVIE 2 Playback information 2 List name POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 3 4 6 7 8 0 MEMORY ENT Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. 3 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. 4 Item number/total 5 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.79) and playback status (such as play/pause). Menu Function 1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list. Play Control 1 Page Down Submenu Function a Resumes playback from pause. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. f 10 Pages Up g Moves 10 pages forward/backward. Skips forward/backward. 10 Pages Down Return Returns to the higher-level list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control to control playback. • You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.101). PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 78 ■ Shuffle/repeat settings You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC music content. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT AUDIO 1 When “SERVER” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM • Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING OPTION Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Item Shuffle (Shuffle) PRESET Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. On (On) Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order. “x” appears on the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears on the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the TV screen. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT Repeat (Repeat) 4 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 79 Listening to Internet radio AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world. Playback of Internet radio AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT NET TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 • To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.34). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.127) in the “Information” menu. 1 The browse screen is displayed on the TV. • You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU • The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service. • This service may be discontinued without notice. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the input source. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. 4 • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 80 ■ Browse screen AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT ■ Playback screen 1 2 3 AUDIO 1 2 3 5 TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 4 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU 1 Playback indicator 1 Playback indicator 2 List name 2 Playback information VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM ON SCREEN Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. 3 Contents list POP-UP/MENU 4 Item number/total 5 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT Menu Function Bookmark On (Bookmark Off) Adds/removes the station selected in the list to/from the “Bookmarks” folder (p.82). 3 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. Menu Submenu Adds the current station to the “Bookmarks” folder (p.82). Bookmark On Play Control Function s Stops playback. Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. 1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list. 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. 10 Pages Down Return Returns to the higher-level list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • You can also use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to stop playback. • Some information may not be available depending on the station. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 81 Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks) AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX By registering your favorite Internet radio stations to “Bookmarks”, you can quickly access to them from the “Bookmarks” folder in the browse screen. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT ■ Registering the station on the browse/playback screen TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 3 Access the vTuner website (http://yradio.vtuner.com/) with the web browser on your PC and enter the vTuner ID. You can switch the language. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU Select the desired Internet radio station in the browse screen or start playback of it to display the playback screen. 2 Press the cursor key (r) to select “Bookmark On” and press ENTER. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM 1 POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION The selected station is added to the “Bookmarks” folder. Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN Enter the vTuner ID in this area. DISPLAY BAND • To remove stations from the “Bookmarks” folder, select the station in the “Bookmarks” folder and then “Bookmark Off”. MODE TUNING PRESET • To use this feature, you need to create your personal account. Create your account using your e-mail address. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ■ Registering the station on the vTuner website 1 Select any of Internet radio stations on the unit. This operation is necessary to register the radio station for the first time. 2 Check the vTuner ID of the unit. 4 Register your favorite radio stations. Click the “Add” icon (❤+) next to the station name. • To remove the station from the “Bookmarks” folder, select “Bookmarks” in the Home screen, and then click the “Remove” icon (❤–) next to the station name. You can find the vTuner ID (MAC address of the unit) in “Network” (p.127) in the “Information” menu. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 82 Playing back music with AirPlay The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on the unit via network. iTunes Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit. PC 1 Router The unit Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback screen on the iPod. If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon ( iTunes (example) (wired or wireless) ) appears. iPod (example) iPhone/iPad/ iPod touch • If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly. • To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router. You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.127) in the “Information” menu. 2 • When using a multiple SSID router, access to the unit might be restricted depending on the SSID to connect. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit. On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit (network name of the unit) as the audio output device. iTunes (example) iPod (example) • For details on supported iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.145). Network name of the unit 3 Select a song and start playback. The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback. The playback screen is displayed on the TV. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music with AirPlay En 83 Menu • You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by setting “Network Standby” (p.119) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. AV 1 2 5 3 6 4 7 • You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.120) in the “Setup” menu. V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT • If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the iTunes/iPod stops automatically. • You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.101) in the “Input” menu to “Off”. TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 Play Control Submenu Function a Resumes playback from pause. d Stops playback temporarily. f g Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. Screen Off SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU Caution • When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod immediately. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM Skips forward/backward. • You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control to control playback. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET 1 2 SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT iTunes (example of English version) 3 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 • To control iTunes playback with the remote control of the unit, you need to configure the iTunes preferences to enable iTunes control from remote speakers in advance. ■ Playback screen 4 1 Playback indicator 2 Playback information Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. Check this box 3 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music with AirPlay En 84 Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room where the unit is installed (main zone) and in another room (Zone2). For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main zone), another person can listen to radio in the study room (Zone2). ■ Enjoying videos/music in another room You can enjoy videos/music using a TV placed in another room. ❑ Enjoying videos/music using a TV and speakers • Video/audio signals that can be output to Zone2 vary depending on how you connect the device in Zone2 to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see “Multi-zone output” (p.147). Video (ZONE OUT) • Since there are many possible ways to use the unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the multi-zone connections that best meet your requirements. Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT) Multi-zone configuration examples Study room (Zone2) ■ Enjoying music in another room You can enjoy music using speakers placed in another room. Living room (main zone) Connections TV (for analog video playback): p.87 Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.23 Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.87 Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT) Study room (Zone2) • Analog video/audio sources (including FM/AM radio), and USB and network sources can be output to Zone2. To enjoy the playback of an external device in Zone2, you need to connect the device to analog video/audio jacks of the unit. Living room (main zone) Connections Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.23 Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.87 • Analog audio sources (including FM/AM radio), and USB and network sources can be output to Zone2. To enjoy the playback of an external device in Zone2, you need to connect the device to analog audio jacks of the unit. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 85 ❑ Enjoying videos/music using only a TV Preparing Zone2 Connect the device that will be used in Zone2 to the unit. Caution • Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting speakers or an external amplifier. Video/audio (HDMI) • Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on. Study room (Zone2) Living room (main zone) Connection TV: p.88 • Only HDMI video/audio sources can be output to Zone2. To enjoy the playback of an external device in Zone2, you need to connect the device to an HDMI jack of the unit. ■ Connecting speakers to play back audio Connect speakers to play back audio in Zone2. The connection method varies depending on the amplifier being used (the unit or an external amplifier). ❑ Using the unit’s internal amplifier Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 to the unit with speaker cables. For details, see “Connecting Zone2 speakers” (p.23). PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 86 ❑ Using an external amplifier ■ Connecting a video monitor to play back analog videos Connect the external amplifier (with volume control) placed in Zone2 to the unit with a stereo pin cable and connect speakers to the external amplifier. Connect a video monitor to watch analog videos at Zone2. Depending on the video input jacks available on your video monitor, choose one of the video connection methods. The unit (rear) ZONE OUT (ZONE 2) jacks • The video conversion between the analog video jacks does not work for Zone2 video output. To watch videos played back on a video device on the Zone2 video monitor, you need to connect the video monitor to the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from the DVD player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks with a component video cable. ZONE OUT L R The unit (rear) ZONE 2 External amplifier Audio input (analog stereo) Video input (component video or composite video) L MONITOR OUT R PB Y PR PR COMPONENT VIDEO PB AUDIO Y ZONE OUT Y PR PB PR PB V Y ZONE OUT jacks (COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO) VIDEO V Zone2 Main zone Zone2 Main zone To assign the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks to the Zone2 video monitor, set “Monitor Out Assign” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2”. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 87 ■ Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as a TV) to play back videos/audio at Zone2. If you connect an AV amplifier, you can enjoy multi-channel playback in another room (Zone2). • Videos/audio interruptions may happen in another zone when any of the following operations is performed. – Tuning on/off a TV connected to the unit via HDMI or switching the TV input – Enabling/disabling a zone output or selecting its input source – Changing the sound mode or audio settings (such as “Extended Surround”) • To watch videos played back on a video device at Zone2, you need to connect the video device to the unit with an HDMI cable (p.28). • We recommend that you disable HDMI Control on the playback devices connected to the unit. • On-screen operations are not available for Zone2. The unit (rear) HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack (Example: using a TV) HDMI input HDMI OUT 2 HDMI (ZONE OUT) HDMI HDMI Zone2 (Example: using an AV amplifier) HDMI input HDMI HDMI Main zone Zone2 To assign the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack to Zone2, set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2”. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 88 ■ Operating the unit from Zone2 (remote connection) You can operate the unit or external devices from Zone2 using the remote control supplied with each device if you connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit’s REMOTE IN/OUT jacks. Remote connections between Yamaha products An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using Yamaha products that support remote connections, as the unit does. You can transmit remote control signals by connecting the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an infrared signal receiver. REMOTE IN/OUT jacks • (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only) You can operate external devices with the supplied remote control if you register a remote control code for each device. For details, refer to “Supplement for Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM. REMOTE REMOTE IN/OUT jacks REMOTE IN IN OUT OUT REMOTE IN/OUT jacks Infrared signal receiver The unit (rear) Yamaha products (up to six, including the unit) REMOTE IN OUT Remote control Zone2 Infrared signal transmitter Infrared signal receiver External device (such as a CD player) Remote control (supplied with each device) Zone2 Main zone PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 89 z Controlling Zone2 4 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT Input selection keys 1 2 TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 MAIN/ZONE2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU 3 Set MAIN/ZONE2 to “ZONE2”. Refer to the instruction manual for the external device. Press z (receiver power). For details on the following operations, see the corresponding pages. Each time you press the key, Zone2 is enabled or disabled. • Listening to FM/AM radio (p.63) When Zone2 is enabled, “ZONE2” lights up in the front display. • Playing back iPod music (p.70) • Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.73) Use the input selection keys to select an input source. • Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.76) • Listening to Internet radio (p.80) POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND Start playback on the external device or select a radio station. • Video/audio signals that can be output to Zone2 vary depending on how you connect the device in Zone2 to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see “Multi-zone output” (p.147). • You cannot select USB and network sources exclusively for each zone. For example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected for the main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to “SERVER”. • Playing back music with AirPlay (p.83) • The on-screen operations are not available for Zone2. Use the front display or web control (p.92) to control Zone2. MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT • AirPlay is available in Zone2 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing in the main zone. Caution • To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 90 ■ Other operations for Zone2 The following functions are also available when Zone2 is enabled. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT Press VOLUME or MUTE. Selecting the input source and settings at once (SCENE) Press SCENE. TUNER MAIN The party mode allows you to play back in Zone2 the same music that is being played back in the main zone. During the party mode, stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this function when you want to use main zone music as background music for a house party. Adjusting the volume AUDIO ZONE 2 PARTY 1 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN SCENE MUTE Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or off. Setting the sleep timer When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the front display. Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off). Adjusting the high-/low-frequency range of sounds ENTER a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel. RETURN DISPLAY b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”. BAND MODE TUNING MUSIC INFO SLEEP • If the party mode does not work on Zone2, set “Party Mode Set” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu to “Enable” (default). • If “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”, Zone2 output is available only when an HDMI input is selected in the main zone. c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment. PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE Press PARTY. • To register the current settings (input source, volume and tone control) to a scene, hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front display. VOLUME OPTION ■ Enjoying the same source in multiple rooms (party mode) ENHANCER PURE DIRECT SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT Setting range -10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (2.0 dB increments) Default 0.0 dB Adjusting the Zone2 front speaker balance a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel. b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Balance”. c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment. • When “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”, the following functions are not available. – Adjusting the volume, high/low-frequency sound and front speaker balance – Registering the volume and tone control settings to a scene PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 91 Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) You can control the unit with the web control screen displayed in a web browser. Web browser • You can check the IP address of the unit in “Network” (p.127) in the “Information” menu. • You can bookmark the unit’s IP address in the browser or create a shortcut link (p.94) to access the web control screen quickly in the future. However, if you are using a DHCP server, the IP address of the unit may change each time the unit is turned on. Web control • If you have enabled the MAC address filter (p.119), you need to specify the MAC address of your PC to allow the PC to access the unit. For information on how to check the MAC address of your PC, refer to its instruction manual. Web control • If you are using Windows 8, we recommend you start Internet Explorer in the following way. PC Router The unit – Select “Desktop” in the Start screen and click the Internet Explorer icon at the bottom left of the screen. • By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices. Visit the Yamaha website for details. • To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router. • Some security software installed on your PC may block the access of the unit to your PC. In these cases, configure the security software appropriately. • To display the web control screen or turn on the unit from the web control when the unit is in standby mode, set “Network Standby” (p.94) to “On”. • We recommend using one of the following web browsers. – Internet Explorer 9.x, 10.x or 11.x – Safari 6.x 1 2 Start the web browser. Enter the IP address of the unit in the address bar of the web browser. (Example) PLAYBACK ➤ Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) En 92 ■ Top menu screen ■ Control screen 3 1 5 1 6 2 3 4 5 7 1 CONTROL Moves to the control screen for the selected zone. 2 STATUS Turns on/off the power for each zone or displays the input source and volume set for each zone. 3 SETTINGS Moves to the settings screen. 4 PARTY MODE Turns on/off the party mode (p.91). 5 SYSTEM POWER Turns on/off the power for all zones. 6 MAIN VOLUME Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the main zone. You can also select the increments used for volume adjustment. 4 2 6 1 PLAY INFO Selects an input source or controls playback for the selected zone. 2 TOP MENU Moves to the top menu screen. 3 SCENE Selects a scene for the selected zone. 4 POWER Turns on/off the power for the selected zone. 5 VOLUME Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the selected zone. You can also select the increments used for volume adjustment. 6 RELOAD Reloads the current status of the unit. 7 RELOAD Reloads the current status of the unit. • Multi-zone volume adjustment is not available when an external amplifier is used. PLAYBACK ➤ Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) En 93 ■ Settings screen Note • If the network settings are changed, you may need to restart the browser or regain access to the unit. • When using the MAC address filter, make sure you specify the MAC addresses of your network devices correctly. Otherwise, the unit will be inaccessible from your network devices such as PCs and other external devices. 1 • Do not operate the unit during the recovery process, as this may result in the incorrect recovery of the settings. When the recovery finishes, click “OK” to set the unit to standby mode. • The backup does not contain user information (such as user account and password) or unit-specific information (such as MAC address and IP address). • Some characters entered with a PC may not appear correctly on the unit. 2 3 1 Rename Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.120) or the name of each zone (p.121). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit. Network Selects the network connection method (p.119) or configures the network parameters (such as IP address) (p.119). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit. MAC Filter Sets the MAC address filter (p.119) to limit access to the unit from the network devices. Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit. Auto Reload Enables/disables automatic reloading. When “Auto Reload” is “On” (enabled), the web control screen reloads the status of the unit every 5 seconds. Network Standby Enables/disables the network standby function (p.119). Backup/Recovery Creates a backup of the unit’s settings on the PC or restores the settings from the backup. Firmware Update Updates the firmware of the unit by using the firmware you have downloaded on the PC. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the firmware update. Create Link Creates a shortcut link to the desired control screen. Tips Displays tips for use of the web control. 2 BACK Moves to the top menu screen. 3 RELOAD Reloads the current status of the unit. PLAYBACK ➤ Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) En 94 Viewing the current status AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 Switching information on the front display AUDIO PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT 1 TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 Press INFO. Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. Input source group USB SERVER AirPlay SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO DOCK TAG HD IN OUT 1 OUT 2 PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP HD 3 MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM Info AudioDecoder Item Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) * During simple playback of iPod: DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) Song (song title), Album (album name), Station (station name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) Item name TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. OPTION Viewing the status information on the TV ENTER DOCK TAG HD RETURN DISPLAY DISPLAY PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP HD 3 BAND AV1 ProLogic MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR MODE TUNING PRESET * The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears. Information 1 MOVIE Press DISPLAY. The following information is displayed on the TV. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT Compressed Music Enhancer status INFO INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 3 4 • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed item can also be applied separately to each input source group. Input source group Item AV 1–7 V-AUX AUDIO 1–4 PHONO DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) TUNER * (U.S.A. model only) HD Radio data is also available when the unit is tuned into an HD Radio station (p.65). * (U.K. and Europe models only) Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.67). Input source/ Party mode status Volume/ YPAO Volume status Audio format/ Decoder Sound mode CINEMA DSP status 2 To close the information display, press DISPLAY. PLAYBACK ➤ Viewing the current status En 95 Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily configure settings during playback. 1 Press OPTION. Option menu items • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. • Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. DOCK TAG HD IN OUT 1 OUT 2 PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP HD 3 Option ToneControl • Default settings are underlined. MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Front display Item Function Tone Control (Tone Control) Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of sounds. 97 Enables/disables YPAO Volume. 97 Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume is adjusted. 97 YPAO Volume (YPAO Vol.) YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume) Adaptive DRC (A.DRC) Dialogue (Dialog) TV screen 2 3 4 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. Page Dialogue Level Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. (Dialog Lvl) 98 Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift) 98 Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. Subwoofer Trim Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. Subwoofer/Bass (SW.Trim) (Subwoofer/Bass) Extra Bass Enables/disables Extra Bass. (Extra Bass) 98 98 • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. Enhancer (Enhancer) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 98 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Video Processing (Video Process.) Enables/disables the video signal processing settings configured in the “Setup” menu. 99 Corrects volume differences between input sources. 99 Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made for one input source. 99 Selects a video to be output with the audio input source. 99 (U.S.A. model only) Switches between stereo and monaural for FM/AM radio reception. 99 Input Trim (In.Trim) To exit from the menu, press OPTION. Input Settings Audio Select (Input Settings) (A.Sel) Video Out (V.Out) Audio Mode (Audio Mode) PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 96 Page ■ YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume) Item Function FM Mode (FM Mode) (Except for U.S.A. model) Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception. 99 Traffic Program (TrafficProgram) (U.K. and Europe models only) Automatically searches for a traffic information station. 68 Enables/disables YPAO Volume. When YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural sounds even at low volume. Shuffle (Shuffle) Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.72), USB storage device (p.75), or media server (p.79). — Settings Repeat (Repeat) Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.72), USB storage device (p.75), or media server (p.79). — Enables/disables YPAO Volume or Adaptive DRC. YPAO Volume (YPAO Vol.) Off (Off) Disables YPAO Volume. On (On) Enables YPAO Volume. ■ Tone Control (Tone Control) Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds. Choices Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass) • YPAO Volume works effectively after the measurement results of “Auto Setup” have been already saved (p.38). • We recommend enabling both YPAO Volume and Adaptive DRC when you are listening at lower volumes or at night. Setting range -6.0 dB to Bypass (Bypass) to +6.0 dB, *0.5 dB increments Adaptive DRC (A.DRC) Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to playback at a low volume at night. • If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels. Settings • You can also adjust the “Tone Control” setting with the front panel controls by pressing TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”, and PROGRAM to make an adjustment. Off (Off) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted. On (On) Automatically adjusts the dynamic range when YPAO Volume is enabled. If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a high volume. On Off Input level Volume: high Output level Output level Volume: low On Off Input level PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 97 ■ Dialogue (Dialog) ■ Subwoofer/Bass (Subwoofer/Bass) Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds. Adjust the subwoofer volume or bass sound. Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl) Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim) Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard clearly, you can turn up its volume by increasing this setting. Setting range 0 to 3 Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. Setting range -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Extra Bass (Extra Bass) Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift) Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is coming from below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing this setting. • This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met. Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the presence or absence of the subwoofer. Settings Off (Off) Disables Extra Bass. On (On) Enables Extra Bass. – One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) is selected when front presence speakers are used. – Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.58) is working. (You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.) Setting range 0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position) ■ Enhancer (Enhancer) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.62). • This setting is applied separately to each input source. Ideal position • You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.62). Settings Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer. On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer. Default TUNER, USB, (network sources): On (On) Others: Off (Off) • Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz. PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 98 ■ Video Processing (Video Process.) Video Out (V.Out) Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio) settings configured in “Processing” (p.116) in the “Setup” menu. Selects a video to be output with the audio input source. Settings Settings Direct (Direct) Processing (Processing) Off (Off) Does not output video. AV 1–7 (AV1–7), V-AUX (V-AUX) Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks. Disables the video signal processing. Enables the video signal processing. Default USB: V-AUX (V-AUX) Others: Off (Off) ■ Input Settings (Input Settings) Configures the input settings. ■ Audio Mode (Audio Mode) (U.S.A. model only) • This setting is applied separately to each input source. Switches between stereo and monaural for FM/AM radio reception. Input Trim (In.Trim) Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it. • This setting is applied separately to each band (FM/AM). Settings Setting range -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Auto (Auto) Receives the selected band (FM or AM) in stereo sounds when the signal reception is good and in monaural sounds when it is not good. Mono (Mono) Receives the selected band (FM or AM) in monaural sounds. Audio Select (A.Sel) Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made for one input source. Settings • HD Radio programs are not available when the unit is in the monaural reception mode. Auto (Auto) Automatically selects the audio input jack in the following priority order. 1. HDMI input 2. Digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL) 3. Analog input (AUDIO) HDMI (HDMI) Always selects HDMI input. No sounds are produced when no signals are input through the HDMI jack. Coax/Opt (Coax/Opt) Always selects digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL). No sounds are produced when no signals are input through the COAXIAL or OPTICAL jack. Analog (Analog) Always selects analog input (AUDIO). No sounds are produced when no signals are input through the AUDIO jacks. ■ FM Mode (FM Mode) (Except for U.S.A. model) Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception. Settings Stereo (Stereo) Receives FM radio in stereo sounds. Mono (Mono) Receives FM radio in monaural sounds. PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 99 CONFIGURATIONS Configuring input sources (Input menu) 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. You can change the input source settings using the TV screen. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 3 5 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured and press the cursor key (q). Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Input menu items • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. • Default settings are underlined. The input source of the unit also changes. • You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3. Item Function Rename/Icon Select Changes the input source name and icon. 101 Decoder Mode Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS. 101 Volume Interlock Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay. 101 DMC Control Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. 101 CONFIGURATIONS Page ➤ Configuring input sources (Input menu) En 100 ■ Rename/Icon Select ■ Decoder Mode Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen. Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”. Input sources AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, USB, MULTI CH ■ Setup procedure 1 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a template and press the cursor key (w). For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder Mode” to “DTS”. Input sources AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned) Settings Auto Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal. DTS Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.) ■ Volume Interlock Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay. Input sources AirPlay Settings 2 3 4 • You cannot change the template or icon for “USB” when an iPod is connected. Off Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w). Limited Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range (-80 dB to 0 dB and mute). Full Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to +16.5 dB and mute). Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. ■ DMC Control Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. Input source SERVER Settings Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback. Enable Allows DMCs to control playback. • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 5 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. • A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network. When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media Player 12) on the same network. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 6 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring input sources (Input menu) En 101 Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. 5 6 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting. You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.55) using the TV screen. 1 2 3 Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Scene menu items Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and press the cursor key (q). Item Function Save Registers the current settings in the selected scene. Page 102 Load Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can also configure the SCENE link playback setting, select items to be included as the scene assignments, or view the settings currently assigned to the selected scene. 103 Rename/Icon Select Changes the scene name and icon. 104 Reset Restores the default settings for the selected scene. 104 ■ Save • You can still switch the scene by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3. Registers the unit’s current settings (such as input source and sound program) in the selected scene. • If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device assigned to the corresponding SCENE key (p.56). CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) En 102 ■ Load Detail Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene assignments. Device Control Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected to the unit via HDMI. (SCENE link playback) Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. You can also view the settings currently assigned to the selected scene. To include items as the scene assignments, use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to check the box (or uncheck the box to exclude). For example, if you often adjust the volume while watching TV but listen to radio with low volume at night, exclude “Volume” from the assignments for SCENE2 (TV) and include “Volume” in the assignments for SCENE4 (RADIO). Settings Off Disables the SCENE link playback function. HDMI Control Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this if an HDMI Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is connected to the unit via HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports HDMI Control. Check or uncheck Default SCENE1 (BD/DVD), SCENE2 (TV): HDMI Control SCENE3 (NET), SCENE4 (RADIO), SCENE5–12: Off Choices • To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set “HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.147). Input Input (p.54), Audio Select (p.99) HDMI Output HDMI Output (p.54) Mode Sound Program (p.57), Pure Direct Mode (p.115), Enhancer (p.62) Sound Tone Control (p.97), YPAO Volume (p.97), Adaptive DRC (p.97), Extra Bass (p.98) Surround CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (p.115), Dialogue Lift (p.98), Dialogue Level (p.98), Subwoofer Trim (p.98), Extended Surround (p.116) Video Video Mode (p.116) Volume Master Volume (p.54) Lipsync Lipsync (p.114), Delay (p.115) Speaker Setup Setting Pattern (p.111), PEQ Select (p.113) Default Input, HDMI Output, Mode: selected Sound, Surround, Video, Volume, Lipsync, Speaker Setup: not selected CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) En 103 ■ Rename/Icon Select Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen. ■ Setup procedure 1 2 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w). Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the TV screen. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be configured and press the cursor key (q). Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press ENTER. Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 4 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 5 • You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Reset Restores the default settings (p.55) for the selected scene. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 104 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. Sound Program menu items • Available items vary depending on the selected sound program or surround decoder. • Default settings are underlined. ■ Settings for sound programs • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. Item Function Decode Type bPro Logic*, bPLIIx Movie (bPLII Movie), bPLIIx Music* (bPLII Music*), Selects a surround decoder to be used bPLIIx Game* (bPLII in combination with the selected sound Game*), Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music* program. (* Available only when “SURROUND DECODER” is selected) DSP Level Adjusts the sound field effect level. -6 dB to 0 dB to +3 dB Higher to enhance the sound field effect, and lower to reduce it. Initial Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and presence sound field generation. 1 ms to 99 ms Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it. Surround Initial Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround sound field generation. • To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”. 5 6 Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Surround Back Initial Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround back sound field generation. Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the presence sound field. Surround Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround sound field. Surround Back Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround back sound field. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Settings 1 ms to 49 ms Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it. 0.1 to 2.0 Higher to enhance the broadening effect, and lower to reduce it. Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 105 Item Function Liveness Adjusts the loss of the presence sound field. The following items are available when you select “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo”. Settings Sound program 0 to 10 Higher to enhance the reflectivity, and lower to reduce it. Surround Liveness Adjusts the loss of the surround sound field. Surround Back Liveness Adjusts the loss of the surround back sound field. Reverb Time Adjust the decay time of the rear reverberant sound. 1.0 s to 5.0 s Higher to enrich the reverberant sound and lower to have clear sound. Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and reverberant sound generation. 0 ms to 250 ms Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it. Adjusts the volume of the reverberant sound. 0% to 100% Higher to strengthen the reverberant sound, and lower to weaken it. Reverb Delay Reverb Level 2ch Stereo Item Function Settings Direct Selects whether to automatically bypass the DSP circuit when an analog audio source is played back. Auto, Off Level Adjusts the entire volume. -5 to 0 to +5 Front / Rear Balance Adjusts the front and rear volume balance. -5 to 0 to +5 Higher to enhance the front side, and lower to enhance the rear side. Left / Right Balance Adjusts the left and right volume balance. -5 to 0 to +5 Higher to enhance the right side, and lower to enhance the left side. Height Balance Adjust the height volume balance using the front presence speakers. 0 to 5 to 10 Higher to enhance the upside, and lower to enhance the downside. (The front presence speakers do not produce sounds when “Height Balance” is set to “0”.) Monaural Mix Enables/disables monaural sound output. Off, On 7ch Stereo • Available items in “7ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 106 ■ Settings for decoders The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “SURROUND DECODER” to “bPLIIx Music” (bPLII Music) or “Neo:6 Music”. Decode Type Item Function Settings Panorama Adjusts the broadening effect of the front sound field. Off, On Select “On” to wrap front left/right channel sounds around the field and generate a spacious sound field in combination with the surround sound field. Center Width Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field. 0 to 3 to 7 Higher to enhance the broadening effect, and lower to reduce it (closer to center). Dimension Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields. -3 to 0 to +3 Higher to strengthen the front sound field and lower to strengthen the surround sound field. Center Image Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field. 0.0 to 0.3 to 1.0 Higher to strengthen the center orientation level (less broadening effect) and lower to weaken (more broadening effect). bPLIIx Music (bPLII Music) Neo:6 Music CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 107 Configuring various functions (Setup menu) 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 3 5 6 Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 108 Setup menu items Menu Item Function Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO). 38 Setting Pattern Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them. 111 Setting Data Copy Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction. 111 Power Amp Assign Selects a speaker system. 111 Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 112 Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 112 Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 112 Surround Back Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size. 112 Front Presence Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected. 112 Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase. 113 Layout Selects a surround speaker layout when surround speakers are used. 113 Bass Cross Over Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component that can be output from speakers whose size is set to “Small”. 113 Auto Setup Speaker Page Configuration Manual Setup Lipsync Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 113 Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 113 Parametric EQ Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 113 Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. 114 Delay Enable Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. 114 Auto/Manual Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 114 Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 115 Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 115 Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 115 Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 115 Pure Direct Mode Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode. 115 Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level. 115 Adjustment Sound Video CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. 115 Extended Surround Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers are used. 116 Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio). 116 CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 109 Menu Item HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input). 117 HDMI Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 118 Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 118 Network Connection Selects the network connection method. 119 IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 119 Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 119 MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 119 Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 120 Network Main Zone Set Function Page Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 121 Volume Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output. 121 Max Volume Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness in the second zone. 121 Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. 121 Mono Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output. 122 Zone Scene Rename Changes the scene names (for Zone2) displayed on the front display. 122 Zone Rename Zone2 Set Multi Zone Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 122 Monitor Out Assign Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks are used. 122 HDMI OUT2 Assign Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used. 122 Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode. 122 Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source. 123 Dimmer (Front Display) Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 123 Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated. 123 Wallpaper Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. 123 Input Assignment Display Set Function Trigger Output1 Trigger Mode Trigger Output2 Target Zone Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. 124 Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. 124 DC OUT Selects how to supply power through the DC OUT jack. 124 Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 125 Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 125 ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). 126 Select an on-screen menu language. 126 Power Mode ECO Language CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 110 Speaker (Manual Setup) Configures the speaker settings manually. ■ Setting Data Copy Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction. Choices Pattern1 > 2 Copies the “Pattern1” parameters to “Pattern2”. Pattern2 > 1 Copies the “Pattern2” parameters to “Pattern1”. • Some speaker settings are not available depending on the selected “Power Amp Assign” setting. • Default settings are underlined. ■ Power Amp Assign Selects a speaker system. The unit has 7 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 9 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to create the favorite acoustic space in your room. You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system. Settings ■ Setting Pattern Basic Select this option when you use the basic speaker configuration (up to 7-channel plus front presence speakers) (p.16). Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them. 7ch +1ZONE Select this option when you use 7-channel speakers in the main zone and Zone2 speakers (p.22). When you configure the following speaker settings, the settings will be memorized in the selected pattern. 5ch BI-AMP Select this option when you use 5-channel speakers (including bi-amp front speakers) (p.21). 5ch BI-AMP +SB Select this option when you use 5-channel speakers (including bi-amp front speakers) plus surround back channel expansion using an external amplifier (p.22). • Measurement results (Auto Setup) • Power Amp Assign • Configuration • Distance ■ Configuration • Level Configures the output characteristics of the speakers. • Parametric EQ Settings Pattern1, Pattern2 • When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm (6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”). • The setting pattern currently selected is shown at the top of the “Manual Setup” screen. • This function is useful when you want to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your listening environment. For example, if you want to switch the settings when curtains are open or closed, you can save the settings suited for each condition and switch between them. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 111 Front Surround Back Selects the size of the front speakers. Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes. Settings Settings Large Select this option for large speakers. The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency components. Large x1 Select this option when one large speaker is connected. The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back channel frequency components. Small Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”). Large x2 Select this option when two large speakers are connected. The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back channel frequency components. Small x1 Select this option when one small speaker is connected. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”). Small x2 Select this option when two small speakers are connected. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”). None Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected. The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio. • “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”. Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. Settings Large Select this option for large speakers. The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency components. Small Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”). None Select this option when no center speaker is connected. The front speakers will produce center channel audio. • This setting is not available when “Surround" is set to "None", or when “Layout (Surround)" is set to "Front". Front Presence Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected. Settings Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes. Use Select this option when front presence speakers are connected. None Select this option when no front presence speakers are connected. Settings Large Select this option for large speakers. The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel frequency components. Small Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”). None Select this option when no surround speakers are connected. The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 112 ■ Distance Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase. Settings Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance from “Meter” or “Feet”. Normal Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase not reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. Choices Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer Reverse Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. Setting range 0.30 m to 3.00 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 10.0 ft to 80.0 ft), *0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments Use None Select this option when no subwoofer is connected. The front speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. ■ Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. Choices Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer • When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase. Setting range -10.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Layout Selects a surround speaker layout when surround speakers are used. ■ Parametric EQ Choices Surround Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. Settings Settings Rear Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the rear side of the room. Front Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the front side of the room. Virtual CINEMA FRONT (p.60) works in this case. • This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”. Bass Cross Over Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency components that can be output from a speaker whose size is set to “Small”. A frequency sound lower than the specified value will be produced from the subwoofer or front speakers. Settings 40 Hz, 60 Hz, 80 Hz, 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz • If the volume and crossover frequency are adjustable on your subwoofer, set the volume to half and crossover frequency to maximum. Manual Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually. For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”. YPAO:Flat Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics. YPAO:Front Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as the front speakers. YPAO:Natural Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound. Through Does not use the equalizer. • “YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto Setup” have already been saved (p.38). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results. ■ Manual equalizer adjustment 1 2 3 Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER. Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen. Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 113 Sound • To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”. • To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.38) to the “Manual” fields for fine adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type. 4 Configures the audio output settings. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain. ■ Lipsync Adjusts the delay between video and audio by holding up the audio output. Setting range Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB 5 To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER repeatedly to select an item. Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain. Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain. Setting range Center frequency: 31.3 Hz to 16.0 kHz Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080 6 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Delay Enable Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. Choices AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4 Settings Disable Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source. Enable Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source. Auto/Manual Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. Setting range ■ Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker balance or equalizer while confirming its effect. Auto Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the unit via HDMI. If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”. Manual Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video and audio output manually. Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”. Settings Off Does not output test tones. On Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance or equalizer. • Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on the TV connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 114 ■ Initial Volume Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”. Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on. Settings Off Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode. On Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments). (This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max Volume”.) ■ Pure Direct Mode Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode (p.62). Setting range 0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments) Settings Auto Automatically outputs video signals when any videos are input from the selected input source or an input source that can be operated with the on-screen display is selected. When no video signals are input, the wall paper is displayed. Video Off Does not output video signals including the wall paper. • “Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment and fine adjustment. ■ Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. Settings ■ Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level. Settings Maximum Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range. Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use. Minimum/Auto Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low volumes. When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is automatically adjusted based on the input signal information. ■ Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. Setting range -30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB Off Does not adjust the effect level automatically. On Adjusts the effect level automatically according to the YPAO measurement results and the volume level. ■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D (p.58). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP 3D functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo). Settings Off Disables CINEMA DSP 3D. On Enables CINEMA DSP 3D. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 115 ■ Extended Surround Video Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers are used. Configures the video output settings. Settings Auto Automatically selects the most suitable decoder if signals that contain surround back channel signals are input, and reproduces the signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. If two surround back speakers are connected, the unit reproduces the 5.1-channel signals in 7.1-channel. bPLIIx Movie Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie decoder. This setting is available only when two surround back speakers are connected. bPLIIx Music Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music decoder. This setting is available only when one or two surround back speakers are connected. EX/ES Automatically selects the Dolby EX or DTS-ES decoder, and reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. Off Always reproduces signals in their original channels. (Even when DTS-ES or Dolby Digital Surround EX signal is input, the unit reproduces the signal in 5.1-channel.) ■ Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio). Settings Direct Disables the video signal processing. Processing Enables the video signal processing. Select a resolution and an aspect ratio in “Resolution” and “Aspect”. • Some early Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS-ES sources do not contain a flag for reproducing surround back channel. We recommend you set “Extended Surround” to “bPLIIx Movie” or “EX/ES” when playing back those sources. • When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to reduce video output delay. • When “Video Mode” is set to “Processing” and the resolution is being converted, short messages are not displayed on the TV screen. Resolution Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. Settings Through Does not convert the resolution. Auto Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution. 480p/576p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p, 4K Output video signals with a selected resolution. (Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.) • If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MONITOR CHECK” (p.130) in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be displayed on your TV normally.) CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 116 Aspect HDMI Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. Configures the HDMI settings. Settings Through Does not convert the aspect ratio. 16:9 Normal Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side of the screen. • This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i, 1080p, or 2160p (4K) signals. ■ HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.147). Settings Off Disables HDMI Control. On Enables HDMI Control. Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby Sync”. • To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.147) after connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices. TV Audio Input Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner. Settings AUDIO 1–4 Default AUDIO 1 • When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 117 ARC HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2 Enables/disables ARC (p.149) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack or HDMI OUT 2 jack. Settings Off Disables ARC. On Enables ARC. • You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use the TV’s speakers. Settings Off Disables the audio output from the TV. On Enables the audio output from the TV. • The HDMI OUT 1–2 jacks output 2-channel audio signals when the unit is turned on. Standby Sync ■ Standby Through Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On”, you can use the input selection keys (AV 1–7 and V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks). Settings Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off. On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off. Auto Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals. Settings Off Does not output videos/audio to the TV. On Outputs videos/audio to the TV. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) ■ Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. • This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”. • The “Amp” and “HDMI OUT1” settings are available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”. • The “HDMI OUT2” setting is available only when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.122) is set to “Main”. Amp Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones connected to the unit. Settings Off Disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones. On Enables the audio output from the speakers and headphones. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 118 Network 2 Configures the network settings. IP Address Specifies an IP address. Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask. Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway. DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server. DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server. ■ Network Connection Selects the network connection method. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a value. 4 5 6 7 To confirm the setting, press ENTER. To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4. To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Settings Wired Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network with a commercially-available network cable (p.34) Wireless (Wi-Fi) Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network via the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.47). Wireless Direct Select this option when you want to connect a mobile device to the unit directly. For details on settings, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct)” (p.52). ■ IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). DHCP ■ Network Standby Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network standby). Settings Off Disables the network standby function. On Enables the network standby function. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) ■ MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. Filter Select whether to use a DHCP server. Enables/disables the MAC address filter. Settings Settings Off Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”. Off Disables the MAC address filter. On Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network parameters (such as IP address). On Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit. ■ Manual network settings 1 Set “DHCP” to “Off”. • AirPlay (p.83) and DMC (p.101) operations are not subject to the MAC address filter. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 119 MAC Address 1–10 Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Procedure 1 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1–5” or “MAC Address 6–10” and press ENTER. 2 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press ENTER. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a value. 4 5 6 To confirm the setting, press ENTER. To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. ■ Procedure 1 2 Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 3 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 120 Multi Zone Configures the multi zone settings. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Zone2 Set Configures the Zone2 settings. Volume Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output. If you have connected an external amplifier with volume control to the unit, disable volume adjustments for Zone2. Settings ■ Main Zone Set Fixed Disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output. Variable Enables volume adjustments for Zone2 output. Configures the main zone setting. Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen. • This setting is not available when “Power Amp Assign” (p.111) is set to “7ch +1ZONE”. Max Volume Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. ■ Procedure 1 2 Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. Setting range -30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB • This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”. Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. Settings Off Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode. On Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments). (This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max Volume”.) • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 3 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. • This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 121 Mono ■ Monitor Out Assign Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output. Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO and VIDEO) jacks are used. Settings Off Produces stereo sounds in Zone2. On Produces monaural sounds in Zone2. Zone Scene Rename Changes the scene names (for Zone2) displayed on the front display. ■ Procedure 1 2 3 Use the cursor keys to select a scene to be renamed and press ENTER. Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. Settings Main, Zone2 • To watch videos played back on a video device on the Zone2 video monitor, you need to connect the video monitor to the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from the DVD player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks with a component video cable. ■ HDMI OUT2 Assign Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used. Settings Main, Zone2 • For details on video/audio signals that can be output to Zone2, see “Multi-zone output” (p.147). ■ Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.91). Choice Target: Zone2 Settings • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 4 Disable Disables switching to the party mode. Enable Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control. Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 5 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the front display or TV screen. You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main Zone Set” (p.121). CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 122 Function 3 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use. • You cannot assign both COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to the same input source. ■ Display Set Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display. Dimmer (Front Display) Adjusts the brightness of the front display. ■ Input Assignment Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source. ■ Procedure Example: assigning the OPTICAL (e) jack to the input source “AV 2” 1 Use the cursor keys to select the cell at the intersection of “AV 2” and “Optical”, and press ENTER. Setting range -4 to 0 (higher to brighten) • The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.126) is set to “On”. Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as input selection and volume adjustment). Settings On Displays short messages on the TV screen. Off Does not display short messages on the TV screen. Wallpaper Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. Settings 2 Use the cursor keys to select “e” and press ENTER. Picture1, Picture2, Picture3 Displays the selected image on the TV screen when there is no video signal. Gray Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video signal. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 123 ■ Trigger Output1, Trigger Output2 Target Zone Sets the TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks to function in sync with the power status of each zone or input switching. Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. Settings Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. Main When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the power status of the main zone. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone. Settings Power The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the zone specified with “Target Zone”. Zone2 Source The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in the zone specified with “Target Zone”. An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in “Source.” When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the power status of Zone2. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the input switching in Zone2. All When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the power status of the main zone or Zone2. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone or Zone2. Manual Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal transmission with “Manual”. Source ■ DC OUT Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input, switching when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”. Configures the DC OUT jack setting. Choices AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), USB, MULTI CH Settings Low Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input source specified in this option. High Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source specified in this option. Manual Power Mode Selects how to supply power to the Yamaha AV accessory connected to the DC OUT jack. Settings Continuous Supplies power through the DC OUT jack continuously regardless of the power state (on/standby) of the unit. Main Zone Power Sync. Supplies power through the DC OUT jack only when the main zone is turned on. (This setting may not work properly on some accessories.) Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of the external device connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack. Choices Low Stops the electronic signal transmission. High Transmits the electronic signal. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 124 ■ Memory Guard ECO Prevents accidental changes to the settings. Configures the power supply settings. Settings Off Does not protect the settings. On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected. • When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen. Icon ■ Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit or if no input signals are detected for the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby mode. Settings Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically. 20 Minutes Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit and no input signals are detected (or the unit is muted) for 20 minutes. 2 Hours, 4 Hours, 8 Hours, 12 Hours Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for the specified time. For example, when “2 Hours” is selected, the unit will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours. Default U.K. and Europe models: 20 Minutes Other models: Off • Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the front display. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 125 ■ ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode. When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption. Settings Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) You can view information about the unit using the TV screen. Off Disables the eco mode. On Enables the eco mode. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER. • The new setting will take effect after the unit is restarted. • When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark. • If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”. Language Select an on-screen menu language. Settings English English 日本語 Japanese Français French Deutsch German Español Spanish Russian Italiano Italian Chinese • The information on the front display is provided in English only. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) En 126 ■ Network Types of information Displays the network information on the unit. ■ Audio Signal (When using wired or wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection) Displays information about the current audio signal. Format Audio format of the input signal Channel The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE) For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total (3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE). Input IP Address IP address Subnet Mask Subnet mask Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server MAC address Network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.120) Sampling The number of samples per second of the input digital signal MAC Address Bitrate The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal Network Name The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal Wired/Wireless The status of the wired or wireless connection SSID (When using wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection) The SSID of the wireless network Dialogue Output The speaker terminals from which signals are output (When using Wireless Direct) • Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the specifications and settings of the playback device. ■ Video Signal Displays information about the current video signal. SSID The SSID of the wireless network Security Security method Security Key Security key IP Address IP address Subnet mask HDMI Signal Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output Subnet Mask HDMI Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI) MAC Address MAC address Resolutions of input signal (analog) and signal output at the MONITOR OUT jacks (analog) Network Connection “Wireless Direct” indication Analog Resolution ■ HDMI Monitor Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”. Interface TV interface Video Resolution Resolutions supported by the TV CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) En 127 ■ System Displays the system information on the unit. Remote ID The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.129) Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) TV Format The unit’s video signal type (p.130) Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display. Speaker Impedance The speaker impedance setting of the unit (p.129) Tuner Freq. Step (Asia and General models only) The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit (p.130) System ID System ID number 1 2 Firmware Version The version of firmware installed on the unit Set the unit to standby mode. While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z. MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT • If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.132). PROGRAM ■ Multi Zone Displays information about Zone2. Input The input source selected for Zone2 Volume The volume for Zone2 3 4 5 Press PROGRAM to select an item. Press STRAIGHT to select a setting. Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again. The new settings take effect. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 128 ADVANCED SETUP menu items Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR) • Default settings are underlined. Item SPIMP.- Function DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP Page HD 3 SPEAKER IMP. Changes the speaker impedance setting. 129 REMOTE SENSOR Turns on/off of the remote control sensor on the main unit. 129 REMOTE CON AMP Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 129 TUNER FRQ STEP (Asia and General models only) Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting. 130 TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type. 130 MONITOR CHECK Removes the limitation on HDMI video output. 130 RECOV./BACKUP Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup. 131 INITIALIZE Restores the default settings. 131 FIRM UPDATE Updates the firmware. 131 Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. SPIMP.HD 3 SPEAKERIMP. 8MIN PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Settings ON Turns on the remote control sensor. OFF Turns off the remote control sensor. Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP) SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP 131 Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.) DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC Turn on/off the remote control sensor on the main unit. While the remote control sensor is turned off, you cannot control the unit from the remote control. HD 3 VERSION REMOTESENSOR ON REMOTECONAMP ID1 MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default: ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver. Settings ID1, ID2 MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the speakers connected. Settings 6  MIN Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. 8  MIN Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the unit. ■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control 1 To select ID1, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE (BD/DVD) together for 3 seconds. To select ID2, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE (TV) together for 3 seconds. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 129 Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP) (Asia and General models only) DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP HD 3 Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK) SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP TUNERFRQSTEP FM50/AM9 HD 3 Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or region. Settings FM100/AM10 Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz steps and AM by 10-kHz steps. FM50/AM9 Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps and AM by 9-kHz steps. MONITORCHECK YES MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack. Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution” (p.116) when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a different resolution than the detected resolution. Settings YES Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a resolution supported by the TV only.) SKIP Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.) Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 TVFORMAT NTSC MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC • Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV after “MONITOR CHECK” has been set to “SKIP”. PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV. Settings NTSC, PAL Default U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models: NTSC Other models: PAL CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 130 Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 RECOV./BACKUP BACKUP SPIMP.- MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup. ■ Backup/recovery procedure 1 Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE) Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “BACKUP” or “RECOVERY” and press INFO to start the process. Choices BACKUP Creates backup of the settings of the unit in the internal memory. RECOVERY Recovers the settings of the unit from the backup (available only when backup has been created). DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 FIRMUPDATE USB MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. If the unit is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details, refer to the information supplied with updates. ■ Firmware update procedure Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware. 1 Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to start firmware update. Choices Note • Do not turn off the unit during the recovery process. Otherwise, the settings may not be restored correctly. USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device. NETWORK Update the firmware via the network. • The backup does not contain user information (such as user accounts and passwords). Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE) SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 INITIALIZE CANCEL MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC • If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in “Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.132). Checking the firmware version (VERSION) PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Restores the default settings for the unit. Choices SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 VIDEO Restores the default settings for video configurations. ALL Restores the default settings for the unit. CANCEL Does not perform an initialization. VERSION x.xx MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. • You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.128) in the “Information” menu. • It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 131 Updating the unit’s firmware via the network AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and update it. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT 3 If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!” appears on the front display, press MAIN ZONE z on the front panel. TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO • Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more (depending on your Internet connection speed). TOP MENU • If the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update may not be possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case, update the firmware using the USB memory device (p.131). VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM • If you want to update the firmware later, select “CLOSE” in Step 2. “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a message will be displayed in the “System” screen (p.128). You can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in the “System” screen. • For details on update, visit the Yamaha website. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN The firmware update is complete. Note SCENE OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY • You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.131). Information icon BAND A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed after ON SCREEN is pressed. MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 Message System Icon 1 2 Read the on-screen description. To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to select “START” and press ENTER. The on-screen display turns off. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Updating the unit’s firmware via the network En 132 APPENDIX Frequently asked questions The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound balance... If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to optimize the speaker settings again (p.38). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually, use “Manual Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.111). Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the volume control... If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum volume level for the unit in advance (p.115). You can also set the maximum volume for Zone2 (p.121). I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning on the unit... By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.115). You can also set the initial volume for Zone2 (p.121). We are bothered by volume differences when switching between input sources… enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device. I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during operations... By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you when you are watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.123) in the “Setup” menu to turn off the short messages. I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings... You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.125). The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another Yamaha product as well as the unit... When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens, register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each remote control (p.129). You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in the “Option” menu (p.99). I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device even when the unit is in standby mode... I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at all... If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output videos/audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when this function is enabled. To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.147). After connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit, APPENDIX ➤ Frequently asked questions En 133 Troubleshooting Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. First, check the following: a The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets securely. b The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on. c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device. Power, system and remote control Problem Cause Remedy The power does not turn on. The protection circuitry has been activated three times consecutively. When the unit is in this condition, the standby indicator on the unit blinks if you try to turn on the power. As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair. The power does not turn off. The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power supply voltage. Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.) The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers (p.19). The unit enters standby mode automatically. The unit is not reacting. The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again. The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used for the specified time. To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup” menu to “Off” (p.125). The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.129). The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers (p.19). The protection circuitry has been activated because the volume of the unit is too high. Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to “Off” (p.126). The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power supply voltage. Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.) APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 134 Problem The unit cannot be controlled using the remote control. The MHL-compatible mobile device cannot be controlled using the remote control. Cause Remedy The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5). The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries. The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or strong lighting. Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit. (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only) The remote control is set to control external devices. Press RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key lights up in orange). The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.129). The mobile device or its application is not externally controllable. Directly operate the mobile device itself. APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 135 Audio Problem No sound. Cause Remedy Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys. Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input. Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio format of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.127). The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.115). The volume cannot be increased. A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit. The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.127). The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the speaker. To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.114). Audio output of the speaker is disabled. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.38) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the speaker settings (p.111). The volume of the speaker is set too low. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.38) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker volume (p.113). The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable. The speaker is malfunctioning. To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be malfunctioning. The extended surround is disabled. Use “Extended Surround” in the “Setup” menu to select a decoder to be used (p.116). The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency signals. To check if the subwoofer is working properly, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.114). Subwoofer output is disabled. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.38) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use” (p.113). The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer. The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level. The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications. The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from the SPEAKERS terminals. In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.118). The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. No sound is coming from a specific speaker. No sound is coming from the surround back speaker. No sound is coming from the subwoofer. No sound from the playback device (connected to the unit with HDMI). APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 136 Problem No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is used). Only the front speakers work on multichannel audio. Cause Remedy The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers. Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the speakers connected to the unit. A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with an HDMI cable. Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.26). (If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable) The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection. Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack (p.117). (If you are trying to use ARC) ARC is disabled on the unit or TV. Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.118). Also, enable ARC on the TV. The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as PCM) only. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.127). If necessary, change the digital audio output setting on the playback device. The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device. Noise/hum is heard. The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The volume of the unit is too high. Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to “Off” (p.126). A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks. If the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2, HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due to internal circuitry switching. For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio” (p.88). Cause Remedy Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys. Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit. The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV. Set “MONITOR CHECK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.130). The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit. To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.127). For information about video signals supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.149). The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications. The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI. You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.26). Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). The sound is distorted. The sound is interrupted. Video Problem No video. No video from the playback device (connected to the unit with HDMI). The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV. APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 137 Problem The video is interrupted. Cause Remedy (If you are using 2 TVs in the main zone) Another TV is turned off when “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected. Select “HDMI OUT 1” or “HDMI OUT 2” to output the signals only to the TV you are using (p.54). (If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2) HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due to internal circuitry switching. For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio” (p.88). Cause Remedy There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. FM/AM radio Problem (U.S.A. model only) Set “Audio Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio reception (p.99). FM radio reception is weak or noisy. Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. (Except for U.S.A. model) Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio reception (p.99). Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. AM radio reception is weak or noisy. The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats, or other electrical equipment. It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor AM antenna. Select the station manually (p.63). Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. Adjust the AM antenna orientation. Radio stations cannot be selected automatically. The AM radio signal is weak. Select the station manually (p.63). Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with the supplied AM antenna. AM radio stations cannot be registered as presets. Auto Preset has been used. Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations and HD Radio station (U.S.A. model only) only. Register AM radio stations manually (p.64). The unit does not receive HD Radio signals. (U.S.A. model only) The unit is in the monaural reception mode. Set “Audio Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Auto” (p.99). APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 138 USB and network Problem Cause Remedy The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again. The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format. Folders and files in the USB device cannot be viewed. The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function. The files in the USB device cannot be played back continuously. Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder. If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files in the playback folder. The network feature does not function. The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained properly. Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup” menu to “On” on the unit (p.119). If you want to configure the network parameters manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other network devices in your network (p.119). The unit does not detect the USB device. The wireless router (access point) is turned off. Turn on the wireless router. The unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart. Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other. There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router (access point). Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are no obstacles between them. Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood might disturb the wireless communication. Turn off these devices. Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the wireless router (access point). Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point). The media sharing setting is not correct. Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.76). Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access of the unit to your PC. Check the settings of security software installed on your PC. The unit and PC are not in the same network. Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and the PC to the same network. The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit. In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.119). The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played back. The files are not supported by the unit or the media server. Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.76). The files in the PC cannot be played back continuously. Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder. If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files in the playback folder. The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a wireless router (access point). Wireless network is not found. The unit does not detect the PC. APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 139 Problem The Internet radio cannot be played. The iPod does not recognize the unit when using AirPlay. Cause Remedy The selected Internet radio station is currently not available. There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have been stopped. Try the station later or select another station. The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting silence. Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try the station later or select another station. Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your network devices (such as the router). Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station. The port number varies depending on the radio station. The unit is connected to a multiple SSID router. Access to the unit might be restricted by the network separation function on the router. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit. The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network. Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network. The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit. In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the unit (p.119). It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.131). The application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit. Firmware update via the network is failed. APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 140 Error indications on the front display Message Cause Remedy Access denied Access to the PC is denied. Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.76). Access error The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. The unit cannot access the iPod. Turn off the iPod and turn it on again. The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.70). Make sure your router and modem are turned on. There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit. Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.34). Check SP Wires The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly. Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. MHL Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the MHL-compatible mobile device. Turn off the unit and check the connection between the unit and mobile device. No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit. The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. The unit cannot detect the iPod. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again. Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network. Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn it on again. RemID Mismatch The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.129). Remote Off The unit cannot be operated from remote control because the remote control sensor on the main unit is turned off. Use the controls on the front panel. To use the remote control, set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “ON” (p.129). The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the USB device for some reasons. Check the song data. If it cannot be played on another device, the song data may be defective. The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some reason. Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be defective. The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some reason. Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.76). If the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with heavy traffic. No device Unable to play USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. Version error Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again. APPENDIX ➤ Error indications on the front display En 141 Glossary Audio information ■ Audio decoding format Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs. Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources. Dolby Pro Logic IIx DTS Express DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). DTS-HD High Resolution Audio DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). DTS Neo:6 DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound. DSD (Direct Stream Digital) Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for game sources (for 2-channel sources only). DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz. The highest frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology offers better audio quality than that used for CDs. Dolby TrueHD FLAC Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality. DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc. DTS Digital Surround DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs. DTS-ES DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a discrete surround back channel is recorded. MP3 One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality. MPEG-4 AAC An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality than MP3. PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs). APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 142 Sampling frequency/Quantization bit Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”. • Sampling frequency Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate. When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider. • Quantization bit The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more accurate. WAV Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other compression methods. WMA (Windows Media Audio) One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality. ■ Others Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp) A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference. LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio. Lip sync Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag between audio and video output. HDMI and video information Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined and transmitted with a single cable. Deep Color Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors. HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”. MHL MHL (Mobile High-definition Link) is the interface standard for high-speed digital video signal transmission that is developed for mobile devices. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals from mobile devices (such as smartphones) using a single cable with any loss. As with HDMI, MHL complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). x.v.Color “x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid, natural images. APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 143 Network information Yamaha technologies SSID CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor) SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point. Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions (such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP, Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own home. Wi-Fi Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or connect to the Internet wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making connections with network cables by using wireless connection. Only products that complete Wi-Fi Alliance interoperability tests can carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark. WPS WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network. CINEMA DSP 3D The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room. Compressed Music Enhancer The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound system. SILENT CINEMA Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound programs can be enjoyed on headphones. Virtual CINEMA DSP Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a listening room. Virtual CINEMA FRONT Virtual CINEMA FRONT allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front surround speakers. Even if the surround speakers placed in the front, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a listening room. Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without front presence speakers. Even if the front presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D sound field in your room. APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 144 Supported devices and file formats ■ Supported devices About HTC Connect This receiver features “HTC Connect”, a simple way to enjoy all music content from your HTC Connect certified smartphone. ❑ USB devices 1. HTC Connect music streaming provided on this product has been developed based on interoperability testing as defined by the HTC Connect program with the HTC Connect compatible smartphones. • This unit supports USB mass storage class devices (e.g., flash memories or portable audio players) using FAT16 or FAT32 format. 2. HTC Connect has been tested with MP3, AAC, WMA and WAV encoding formats. Other formats may not be compatible. • Do not connect devices other than USB mass storage class devices (such as USB chargers or USB hubs), PCs, card readers, an external HDD, etc. 3. High network congestion may interfere with the operation of HTC Connect. • USB devices with encryption cannot be used. • Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of the USB storage device. ❑ iPod Made for. iPod touch (2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th generation) iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th and 7th generation) iPhone 5, iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G iPad (4th generation), iPad mini, iPad (3rd generation), iPad 2, iPad (as of April 2014) 4. Music navigation via the music progress bar is not currently supported with HTC Connect. Please check HTC website for up to date information about features, compatible devices and audio format support: http://www.htc-connect.com/certified-devices ■ File formats ❑ USB • The unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC, FLAC and ALAC (Apple Lossless Audio Codec) files (1- or 2-channel audio only). • The unit is compatible with sampling rate of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC files, 96 kHz for ALAC files, and 48 kHz for other files. • The unit supports gapless playback of WAV, FLAC and ALAC files. • An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or software version of the iPod. ❑ AirPlay AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X Mountain Lion, and Mac and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later. (as of April 2014) • Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back. ❑ PC/NAS • The unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC, FLAC and ALAC (Apple Lossless Audio Codec) files (1- or 2-channel audio only). • The unit is compatible with sampling rate of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC files, 96 kHz for ALAC files, and 48 kHz for other files. • The unit supports gapless playback of WAV, FLAC and ALAC files. • To play back FLAC files, you need to install server software that supports sharing of FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files. • Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back. APPENDIX ➤ Supported devices and file formats En 145 Video signal flow Video signals input from a video device to the unit are output to a TV as shown below. ■ Video conversion table • You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.116) in the “Setup” menu. • The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably. Video device The unit HDMI out TV Resolution 480i/ 576i 480p/ 576p 720p 1080i 1080p 4K 480i/576i m m m m m m m m m m m 720p m m m m 1080i m m m m 1080p/ 50, 60 Hz m m m m m m 480p/576p HDMI in HDMI out HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI in 1080p/24 Hz COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO m m m m m m m m m m COMPONENT 720p VIDEO in m m m m 1080i m m m m 480i/576i COMPONENT VIDEO out COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR PR PR PB PB PB PB Y Y Y Y m 480p/576p VIDEO VIDEO 480p/ 576p 720p 1080i 1080p 480i/ 576i m m m m m 1080p VIDEO in 480i/ 576i m 4K COMPONENT VIDEO in VIDEO out COMPONENT VIDEO out VIDEO out VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO in 480i/576i m m m m m m m m: Available APPENDIX ➤ Supported devices and file formats En 146 Multi-zone output Information on HDMI ■ Audio output Using the unit’s internal amplifier (p.23) HDMI Control Using an external amplifier (p.87) Zone2 Out EXTRA SP jacks ZONE OUT jacks In HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack (*1) m (*2) Digital audio (HDMI) Analog audio (AUDIO) m m USB (including iPod) m m Network sources m m TUNER m m HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with an HDMI cable. For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.26) and “Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.28). Operations available from the TV’s remote control • Standby synchronization m: Available *1 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” *2 Stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input source selected in the main zone is selected • Volume control including mute • Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner • Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device • Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker) (Example) ■ Video output Zone2 Out In MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks (*3) COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO m HDMI video Component video Composite video m HDMI Control HDMI Control HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack (*4) Playback device also turns off The unit turns off (standby) Turn off the TV m m: Available *3 Available when “Monitor Out Assign” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” *4 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” Operations available from the unit’s remote control • Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene selection (p.55) • Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed) • Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) using the external device operation keys APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 147 d Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”. (Example) HDMI Control HDMI Control Turns on and displays video from the playback device Playback starts Press SCENE (BD/DVD) To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after connecting the TV and playback devices. e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER. For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV. f Use the cursor keys to select “On”. g Press ON SCREEN. • This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. 1 2 3 Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players). 4 Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and playback devices. 5 6 7 Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV. Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices. Configure the settings of the unit. a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. b Press ON SCREEN. ON SCREEN OPTION ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit. Check the followings. On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select the input source manually. c Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed. 8 Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control. • If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 3 and plugging in the TV again in Step 4. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use. • If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on the TV. • We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more effectively. • We do not assure the operation of all HDMI Control-compatible devices. APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 148 Audio Return Channel (ARC) HDMI signal compatibility ARC allows you to input TV audio to the unit with the HDMI cable which transmits video signal to the TV. Audio signals Check the following after the HDMI Control settings. Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example) 1 2 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD Select a TV program with the TV remote control. Check that the input source of the unit will be automatically switched to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit. If you cannot hear the TV audio, check the following: – “ARC” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”. – The HDMI cable is connected to the ARC-compatible HDMI jack (HDMI jack marked “ARC”) on the TV. Some HDMI jack on the TV is not compatible with ARC. For details, refer to the instruction manual for the TV. • If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use an audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable) to input TV audio to the unit (p.26). • When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC. • “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.117) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.56), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE (TV). DSD 2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express Video signals The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions: • VGA • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • 480p/60 Hz • 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • 576p/50 Hz • When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending on the type of the DVD player. • The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction manual for each device. • To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device). For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device. APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 149 Reference diagram (rear panel) (U.S.A. model) • The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. APPENDIX ➤ Reference diagram (rear panel) En 150 Trademarks Windows™ Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, Surround EX and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. This receiver supports network connections. Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Android™ Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS-HD Master Audio is a trademark of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp. HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. Android is a trademark of Google Inc. The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certification mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. The Wi-Fi Protected Setup Identifier Mark is a mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. Ubiquitous WPS2.0 “Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless performance. Copyright © 2013 Ubiquitous Corp. MHL and the MHL logo are a trademark, registered trademark or service mark of MHL, LLC in the United States and/or other countries. x.v.Color™ “x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation. HTC, HTC Connect and the HTC Connect Logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of HTC Corporation. iTunes, AirPlay, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, iPod touch, and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of Digital Living Network Alliance. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation. MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson. APPENDIX ➤ Trademarks En 151 Specifications Input jacks • Analog Audio Audio x 10 (AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, V-AUX) MULTI CH INPUT x 1 (8 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, SUBWOOFER) • Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz) Optical x 3 (AV 3–4, AUDIO 1) Coaxial x 3 (AV 1–2, AUDIO 2) • Video Composite x 5 (AV 1–4, V-AUX) Component x 3 (AV 1–3) • HDMI Input HDMI x 8 (AV 1–7, V-AUX*) * V-AUX: MHL input compatible • Video - Dolby TrueHD - Composite x 1 - Dolby Digital Plus - Component x 1 - Dolby Digital AV OUT - DTS-HD Master Audio - Composite x 1 - DTS-HD High Resolution Audio • HDMI Output NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T) Output jacks • Analog Audio - Speaker Out x 9 (7 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER, - DTS * barter to ZONE OUT (ZONE2) - DSD 2-ch to 6-ch Other jacks • YPAO MIC x 1 • REMOTE OUT x 1 MHL • TRIGGER OUT x 2 • Video Format (Repeater Mode) • RS-232C x 1 HDMI • HDMI features: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, ARC (Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K Ultra HD - 576i/50 Hz - 480p/60 Hz - 576p/50 Hz - 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz - 1080p/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • Audio Format - PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit) - 480p/60 Hz • Current Supply Capacity: 1.0 A - 576p/50 Hz TUNER - Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1–2, mono) - 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz - Audio x 1 (AV OUT) - 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz - ZONE OUT x 1 (ZONE 2) - 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz Optical x 1 (AV OUT) - 576i/50 Hz - 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz • Video Format (Repeater Mode) - 480i/60 Hz • Digital Audio - VGA - 480i/60 Hz • DC OUT x 1 *1 Note: Assignment is possible [ZONE2, F.PRESENCE, SURROUND BACK L/R) • Content Protection: HDCP compatible • Link Function: CEC supported - VGA - Pre Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, - PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit) • REMOTE IN x 1 SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, EXTRA SP L/R*1) BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)] - DTS Express HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT 1–2*) • Others USB x 1 (USB2.0) • Audio Format MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT - 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • Analog Tuner [U.K. and Europe models] FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER) [Other models] FM/AM x 1 (TUNER) • HD Radio tuner [U.S.A. model] x 1 (TUNER) APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 152 USB Audio Section • Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory • Rated Output Power (2-channel driven) • Current Supply Capacity: 2.1 A (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ) Front L/R ............................................................. 110 W+110 W Network Center..............................................................................110 W • PC Client Function Surround L/R ...................................................... 110 W+110 W • Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5 • AirPlay supported Surround Back L/R ............................................. 110 W+110 W (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 ) Front L/R ............................................................. 120 W+120 W • Internet Radio Center..............................................................................120 W • HTC Connect supported Surround L/R ...................................................... 120 W+120 W • WiFi function - Capable of WPS by PIN Method and Push-Button-Method Surround Back L/R ............................................. 120 W+120 W • Rated Output Power (1-channel driven) • Output Level / Output Impedance AV OUT ............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 k HEADPHONE OUT............................................. 150 mV/100  PRE OUT SUBWOOFER (50 Hz)........................................ 1.0 V/1.2 k Except SUBWOOFER (1 kHz)............................ 1.0 V/1.2 k ZONE OUT ............................................................ 1.0 V/1.2 k • Frequency Response AUDIO 2 etc. (10 Hz to 100 kHz)................................ +0/-3 dB • RIAA Equalization Deviation PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) ......................................... 0±0.5 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion PHONO to AV OUT ............................................. 0.02% or less - Capable of Direct Connection with Mobile Device (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 ) MULTI CH INPUT to Speaker Out (Pure Direct, 70 W, 8 ) - Available Security Method: WEP, WPA-PSK (TKIP), WPA-PSK Front L/R .....................................................................135 W/ch ............................................................................ 0.04% or less (AES), WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode Center ........................................................................135 W/ch - Radio Frequency: 2.4GHz Surround L/R ..............................................................135 W/ch - Wireless Network Standard: IEEE 802.11 b/g Surround Back L/R .....................................................135 W/ch Compatible Decoding Formats • Decoding Format - Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus - Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX - DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express - DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 - DTS Digital Surround • Post Decoding Format - Dolby Pro Logic - Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, Dolby Pro Logic II Game - Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game - DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 ) Front L/R [U.K. and Europe models] ..........................170 W/ch • Maximum Effective Output Power (1-channel driven) (JEITA, 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 ) [China, Korea, Asia and General models] • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) (Pure Direct, Input 1 k Shorted, Speaker Out) PHONO .............................................................. 95 dB or more AUDIO2 etc...................................................... 110 dB or more • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Speaker Out ....................................................... 150 µV or less • Channel Separation Front L/R .....................................................................165 W/ch (Input 1 k Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) Center.........................................................................165 W/ch PHONO ....................................................75 dB/60 dB or more Surround L/R ..............................................................165 W/ch Surround Back L/R .....................................................165 W/ch • Dynamic Power (IHF) Front L/R (8/6/4/2 )...................................135/165/210/280 W AUDIO2 etc..............................................75 dB/60 dB or more • Volume Control Main Zone ................ MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step) Zone2 ....................... MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step) • Damping Factor Front L/R, 1 kHz, 8  ............................................. 150 or more • Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 ) ................................ 3.5 mV/47 k AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 ) ...................... 200 mV/47 k • Maximum Input Signal PHONO (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .............................. 60 mV or more AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ........................ 2.4 V or more APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 153 • Tone Control Characteristics Main Zone Bass Boost/Cut .........................±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step) • 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.) Mono .................................................................3 µV (20.8 dBf) • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) • Maximum Power Consumption [Asia and General models] ........................................... 1190 W • Dimensions (W x H x D) Bass Turnover............................................................. 350 Hz Mono/Stereo [except U.S.A. model] .....................71 dB/70 dB ............................ 435 x 182 x 432 mm (17-1/8” x 7-1/8” x 17”) Treble Boost/Cut ..................... ±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step) HD [U.S.A. model]........................................................... 80 dB * Including legs and protrusions Treble Turnover .......................................................... 3.5 kHz Zone2 Bass Boost/Cut .............................±10 dB/50 Hz (2 dB Step) Bass Turnover............................................................. 350 Hz • Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz) Mono/Stereo [except U.S.A. model] ....................... 0.5%/0.6% HD [U.S.A. model]...........................................................0.03% Treble Boost/Cut ...........................±10 dB/50 Hz (2 dB Step) • Antenna Input................................................ 75  unbalanced Treble Turnover .......................................................... 3.5 kHz AM section • Filter Characteristics • Tuning Range (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) [U.S.A. and Canada models] .................. 530 kHz to 1710 kHz H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back: Small) [Asia and General models] ..... 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz .................................................................................. 12 dB/oct. [Other models] ........................................ 531 kHz to 1611 kHz • Reference Dimensions (W x H x D) (with wireless antenna) ......................435 x 242 x 439 mm (17-1/8” x 9-1/2” x 17-1/4”) • Weight...........................................................14.9 kg (32.8 lbs) * Specifications are subject to change without notice. L.P.F. (Subwoofer)..................................................... 24 dB/oct. Video Section • Video Signal Type General • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ..........................AC 120 V, 60 Hz [U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models] ................ NTSC [General model] ............AC 110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz [Other models].................................................................... PAL [China model]..................................................AC 220 V, 50 Hz • Video Signal Type (Video Conversion) .....................NTSC/PAL [Korea model] .................................................AC 220 V, 60 Hz • Video Signal Level [Australia model] .............................................AC 240 V, 50 Hz Composite ............................................................. 1 Vp-p/75  [U.K. and Europe models] ..............................AC 230 V, 50 Hz Component [Asia model] ....................................AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz Y.......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75  • Power Consumption Pb/Pr ................................................................ 0.7 Vp-p/75  [U.S.A. model].................................................................450 W • Video Maximum Input Level .......................... 1.5 Vp-p or more [Canada and Korea models]...........................................380 W • Signal to Noise Ratio ..........................................60 dB or more • Monitor Out Frequency Response Component (MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT) ............................................................5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB [Other models] ................................................................420 W • Standby Power Consumption HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off ..........................0.1 W HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals)......2.4 W Network Standby On FM Section Wired .............................................................................3.1 W • Tuning Range Wi-Fi ..............................................................................3.8 W [U.S.A. and Canada models] ..............87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz Wireless Direct ..............................................................3.9 W [Asia and General models] HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals), .......................................87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz Network Standby On (Wireless Direct).............................5.5 W [Other models].................................87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 154 Index Symbols Exclamation mark (!) Lock icon (o) 125 128, 132 Numerics 16:9 Normal (Aspect, Setup menu) 117 2.1-channel system 17 2ch Stereo (sound program) 59 3.1-channel system 17 4K Ultra HD 149 5.1-channel system 17 5ch BI-AMP (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 111 5ch BI-AMP (speaker configuration) 21 5ch BI-AMP +SB (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 111 5ch BI-AMP +SB (speaker configuration) 22 7.1+2-channel system 16 7.1-channel system 16 7ch +1ZONE (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 111 7ch +1ZONE (speaker configuration) 22 7ch Stereo (sound program) 59 A A.DRC (YPAO Volume, Option menu) 97 A.Sel (Input Settings, Option menu) 99 Access denied (error indication) 141 Access error (error indication) 141 Access Point Scan (Wireless (Wi-Fi), Setup menu) Action Game (sound program) 59 Adaptive DRC (YPAO Volume, Option menu) 97 Adaptive DSP Level (Sound, Setup menu) 115 Adjustment (Lipsync, Setup menu) 115 ADVANCED SETUP menu 128 Advanced speaker configuration 20 Adventure (sound program) 58 AirPlay 83 Album (HD Radio™) 65 AM radio listening 63 Amp (Audio Output, Setup menu) 118 ARC (Audio Return Channel) 149 ARC (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 118 Artist/Song (HD Radio™) 65 Aspect (Video Mode, Setup menu) 117 Audio Decoder (front display information) 95 Audio file format (PC/NAS) 145 Audio file format (USB storage device) 145 Audio Mode (Option menu) 99 Audio Output (HDMI, Setup menu) 118 Audio program selection (HD Radio™) 65 Audio Return Channel (ARC) 149 Audio Select (Input Settings, Option menu) 99 Audio Signal (Information menu) 127 Auto Power Standby (ECO, Setup menu) 125 Auto Preset (FM radio) 69 Auto Preset (HD Radio™) 67 Auto Setup (Speaker, Setup menu) 38 Auto/Manual Select (Lipsync, Setup menu) 114 Automatic station preset (FM radio) 69 Automatic station preset (HD Radio™) 67 AutoPowerStdby (ECO, Setup menu) 125 B 50 Backup/recovery of the settings 131 Banana plug 19 Basic playback operation 54 Basic speaker configuration 16 Bass (Tone Control, Option menu) 97 Bass Cross Over (Speaker, Setup menu) 113 Bitrate (Audio Signal, Information menu) 127 Bitstream 149 Bookmark Off (Internet radio, Option menu) 82 Bookmark On (Internet radio, Option menu) 82 C Category (HD Radio™) 65 Cellar Club (sound program) 59 Center (Speaker, Setup menu) 112 Center Image (Sound Program menu) 107 Center Width (Sound Program menu) 107 Chamber (sound program) 59 Channel (Audio Signal, Information menu) 127 Check SP Wires (error indication) 141 Check Sur. (YPAO error message) 44 CINEMA DSP 58 CINEMA DSP 3D 58 CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (Sound, Setup menu) 115 CLASSICAL (sound program subcategory) 59 Clear Preset (FM/AM radio) 69 Clear Preset (HD Radio™) 67 Clock Time (Radio Data System) 67 Compressed Music Enhancer 62 Configuration (Speaker, Setup menu) 111 Crossover frequency setting (subwoofer) 38 D DC OUT (Function, Setup menu) 124 Decode Type (Sound Program menu) 105 Decoder Mode (Input menu) 101 Decoder Off (front display information) 95 Default Gateway (IP Address, Setup menu) 119 Default Gateway (Network, Information menu) 127 Default setting restoration 131 Delay Enable (Lipsync, Setup menu) 114 Detail (Load, Scene menu) 103 Device Control (Load, Scene menu) 103 DHCP (IP Address, Setup menu) 119 Dialog (Option menu) 98 Dialog Lift (Dialogue, Option menu) 98 Dialog Lvl (Dialogue, Option menu) 98 Dialogue (Audio Signal, Information menu) 127 Dialogue (Option menu) 98 Dialogue Level (Dialogue, Option menu) 98 Dialogue Lift (Dialogue, Option menu) 98 Dialogue normalization level 127 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 155 Digital Media Controller (DMC) 101 Dimension (Sound Program menu) 107 Dimmer (Front Display) (Display Set, Setup menu) 123 Direct (Sound Program menu) 106 Direct Stream Digital (DSD) 142 Display Set (Function, Setup menu) 123 Distance (Speaker, Setup menu) 113 Distance (YPAO measurement result) 43 DLNA 76 DMC (Digital Media Controller) 101 DMC Control (Input menu) 101 DNS Server (IP Address, Setup menu) 119 DNS Server (Network, Information menu) 127 Dolby Digital EX (Extended Surround) 116 Dolby Pro Logic (surround decoder) 61 Dolby Pro Logic II (surround decoder) 61 Dolby Pro Logic IIx (surround decoder) 61 Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie (Extended Surround) 116 Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music (Extended Surround) 116 Drama (sound program) 58 DSD (Direct Stream Digital) 142 DSP Level (Sound Program menu) 105 DSP Program (front display information) 95 DTS Neo:6 (surround decoder) 61 DTS-ES (Extended Surround) 116 Dynamic Range (Sound, Setup menu) 115 FIRM UPDATE (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 131 Firmware update 131 Firmware update (network) 131 Firmware update (USB) 131 Firmware Version (System, Information menu) 128 Firmware version check 131 FM Mode (Option menu) 99 FM radio listening 63 FM/AM radio tuning 63 Format (Audio Signal, Information menu) 127 Frequency (FM/AM radio) 63 Frequency step setting 63, 130 Front (Speaker, Setup menu) 112 Front / Rear Balance (Sound Program menu) 106 Front 5.1-channel system 17 Front display (part names and functions) 10 Front display brightness 123 Front display information 95 Front panel (part names and functions) 8 Front panel door (front panel) 8 Front Presence (Speaker, Setup menu) 112 Function (Setup menu) 123 E Hall in Munich (sound program) 59 Hall in Vienna (sound program) 59 HD Radio™ information 65 HD Radio™ tuning 65 HDMI (Setup menu) 117 HDMI Control (HDMI, Setup menu) 117 HDMI Monitor (Information menu) 127 HDMI OUT1 (Audio Output, Setup menu) 118 HDMI OUT2 (Audio Output, Setup menu) 118 HDMI OUT2 Assign (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 122 HDMI output selection 54 HDMI signal compatibility 149 Headphones 60 Height Balance (Sound Program menu) 106 ECO (Setup menu) 125 ECO Mode (ECO, Setup menu) 126 Enhancer (Option menu) 98 ENHANCER (sound mode) 62 ENTERTAINMENT (sound program subcategory) Error indication (front display) 141 EX/ES (Extended Surround, Setup menu) 116 Extended Surround (Sound, Setup menu) 116 External power amplifier 24 Extra Bass (Subwoofer/Bass, Option menu) 98 F Filter (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 119 59 G Ground lead 30 H High definition audio HTC Connect 145 149 I In.Trim (Input Settings, Option menu) 99 Indicator (part names and functions) 10 Information display (front display) 10 Information menu 126 Information switching (front display) 95 Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 105 Initial Volume (Sound, Setup menu) 115 Initial Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 121 INITIALIZE (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 131 Input (Audio Signal, Information menu) 127 Input Assignment (Function, Setup menu) 123 Input jack assignment 123 Input menu 100 Input Settings (Option menu) 99 Input Trim (Input Settings, Option menu) 99 Internal Error (error indication) 141 Internal Error (YPAO error message) 44 Internet radio listening 80 IP Address (Network, Information menu) 127 IP Address (Network, Setup menu) 119 iPod charge 70 iPod content playback 70 iPod content playback (AirPlay) 83 iTunes content playback (AirPlay) 83 L Language (Setup menu) 126 Layout (Speaker, Setup menu) 113 Left / Right Balance (Sound Program menu) 106 Level (Sound Program menu) 106 Level (Speaker, Setup menu) 113 Level (YPAO measurement result) 43 Level Error (YPAO warning message) 45 LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 143 Lipsync 143 Lipsync (Sound, Setup menu) 114 LIVE/CLUB (sound program subcategory) 59 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 156 Liveness (Sound Program menu) 106 Load (Scene menu) 103 Low Frequency Effects (LFE) 143 M MAC Address (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 120 MAC Address (Network, Information menu) 127 MAC Address Filter (Network, Setup menu) 119 Main Zone Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 121 Manual Setting (Wireless (Wi-Fi), Setup menu) 50 Manual Setup (Speaker, Setup menu) 111 Manual speaker configuration 111 Manual station preset (FM/AM radio) 64 Max Volume (Sound, Setup menu) 115 Max Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 121 Measurement result (YPAO) 43 Media sharing setup 76 Memory Guard (Function, Setup menu) 125 Menu language selection 37 MHL Overloaded (error indication) 141 MHL-compatible mobile device 31 Monaural Mix (Sound Program menu) 106 Monaural reception (FM radio) 63 Monitor check 130 MONITOR CHECK (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 130 Monitor Out Assign (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 122 Mono (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 122 Mono Movie (sound program) 58 MOVIE (sound program category) 58 MOVIE THEATER (sound program subcategory) 58 Multi measurement (YPAO) 41 Multi Zone (Information menu) 128 Multi Zone (Setup menu) 121 Multiple room playback 85 Multi-zone 85 Multi-zone output 147 MUSIC (sound program category) 59 Music Video (sound program) 59 Muting 54 N NAS (Network Attached Storage) 34 NAS content playback 77 Network (Information menu) 127 Network (Setup menu) 119 Network Attached Storage (NAS) 34 Network Connection (Network, Information menu) 127 Network Connection (Network, Setup menu) 119 Network information 127 Network Name (Network, Information menu) 127 Network Name (Network, Setup menu) 120 Network Standby (Network, Setup menu) 119 No content (error indication) 141 No device (error indication) 141 No F.PRNS SP (YPAO error message) 44 No Front SP (YPAO error message) 44 No MIC (YPAO error message) 44 No Signal (YPAO error message) 44 No Sur. SP (YPAO error message) 44 Noisy (YPAO error message) 44 NTSC (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) 130 O Option menu 96 Out of Phase (YPAO warning message) 45 Output (Audio Signal, Information menu) 127 Over Distance (YPAO warning message) 45 P PAL (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) 130 Panorama (Sound Program menu) 107 Parametric EQ (Speaker, Setup menu) 113 Party mode 91 Party Mode Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 122 PC content playback 77 PIN Code (Wireless (Wi-Fi), Setup menu) 51 Please wait (error indication) 141 Power Amp Assign (Speaker, Setup menu) 111 Power management 125 Power Mode (DC OUT, Setup menu) 124 Preset station selection (FM/AM radio) 64 Program Service (Radio Data System) 67 Program Type (Radio Data System) 67 Pure Direct 62 PURE DIRECT (sound mode) 62 Pure Direct Mode (Sound, Setup menu) 115 Q Q factor 114 R Radio Data System information 67 Radio Data System tuning 67 Radio Text (Radio Data System) 67 Rear panel (part names and functions) 11 RECOV./BACKUP (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 131 RemID Mismatch (error indication) 141 REMOTE CON AMP (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 129 Remote control (part names and functions) 13 Remote control ID setting 129 Remote control sensor setting 129 Remote ID (System, Information menu) 128 Remote Off (error indication) 141 REMOTE SENSOR (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 129 Rename (input name) 101 Rename (network name) 120 Rename (scene name) 104 Rename/Icon Select (Input menu) 101 Rename/Icon Select (Scene menu) 104 Repeat (iPod, Option menu) 72 Repeat (PC/NAS, Option menu) 79 Repeat (USB storage device, Option menu) 75 Reset (Scene menu) 104 Resolution (Video Mode, Setup menu) 116 Reverb Delay (Sound Program menu) 106 Reverb Level (Sound Program menu) 106 Reverb Time (Sound Program menu) 106 Reverse (Wiring, YPAO measurement result) 43 Roleplaying Game (sound program) 59 Room Size (Sound Program menu) 105 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 157 S Sampling (Audio Signal, Information menu) 127 Save (Scene menu) 102 SBR → SBL (YPAO error message) 44 Scene configuration 56 SCENE function 55 SCENE link playback 56 Scene menu 102 Sci-Fi (sound program) 58 Security (Network, Information menu) 127 Security Key (Network, Information menu) 127 Setting Data Copy (Speaker, Setup menu) 111 Setting Pattern (Speaker, Setup menu) 111 Setup menu 108 Share Wi-Fi Settings (iOS) (Wireless (Wi-Fi), Setup menu) 47 Short Message (Display Set, Setup menu) 123 Shuffle (iPod, Option menu) 72 Shuffle (PC/NAS, Option menu) 79 Shuffle (USB storage device, Option menu) 75 Signal information 127 SILENT CINEMA 60 Simple play (iPod) 72 Single measurement (YPAO) 40 Size (YPAO measurement result) 43 Sleep timer 13 Sleep timer (Zone2) 91 Sound (Setup menu) 114 Sound field effect 58 Sound mode selection 57 Sound program 58, 59 Sound Program menu 104 Speaker (Setup menu) 111 SPEAKER IMP. (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 129 Speaker impedance 15 Speaker Impedance (System, Information menu) 128 Speaker impedance setting 18, 129 Speaker placement 16 Spectacle (sound program) 58 Sports (sound program) 59 SSID 144 SSID (Network, Information menu) 127 Standard (sound program) 58 Standby Sync (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 118 Standby Through (HDMI, Setup menu) 118 Station Info (HD Radio™) 65 Station preset (FM/AM radio) 64 STEREO (sound program subcategory) 59 Stereo reception (FM radio) 63 STRAIGHT (sound mode) 61 Straight decode 61 Subnet Mask (IP Address, Setup menu) 119 Subnet Mask (Network, Information menu) 127 Subwoofer (Speaker, Setup menu) 113 Subwoofer Trim (Subwoofer/Bass, Option menu) 98 Subwoofer/Bass (Option menu) 98 SUR.DECODE (sound mode) 61 Surround (Speaker, Setup menu) 112 Surround Back (Speaker, Setup menu) 112 Surround Back Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 105 Surround Back Liveness (Sound Program menu) 106 Surround Back Room Size (Sound Program menu) 105 Surround decoder 61 Surround Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 105 Surround Liveness (Sound Program menu) 106 Surround Room Size (Sound Program menu) 105 SW.Trim (Subwoofer/Bass, Option menu) 98 System (Information menu) 128 System ID (System, Information menu) 128 T Target Zone (Trigger Output, Setup menu) 124 Test Tone (Speaker, Setup menu) 114 The Bottom Line (sound program) 59 The Roxy Theatre (sound program) 59 Tone Control (Option menu) 97 TP (Traffic Program) 68 Traffic information (Radio Data System) 68 Traffic Program (FM radio, Option menu) 68 Treble (Tone Control, Option menu) 97 Trigger function 36 Trigger Mode (Trigger Output, Setup menu) 124 Trigger Output1 (Function, Setup menu) 124 Trigger Output2 (Function, Setup menu) 124 TUNER FRQ STEP (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 130 Tuner Frq. Step (System, Information menu) 128 TV Audio Input (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 117 TV FORMAT (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 130 TV Format (System, Information menu) 128 U Unable to play (error indication) 141 USB Overloaded (error indication) 141 USB storage device content playback 73 User Cancel (YPAO error message) 44 V V.Out (Input Settings, Option menu) 99 VERSION (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 131 Version error (error indication) 141 Video (Setup menu) 116 Video Mode (Video, Setup menu) 116 Video Out (Input Settings, Option menu) 99 Video Process. (Option menu) 99 Video Processing (Option menu) 99 Video Signal (Information menu) 127 Video signal flow 146 Video signal type setting 130 Virtual CINEMA DSP 60 Virtual CINEMA FRONT 60 Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) 7 Voltage selection 36 Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 121 Volume Interlock (Input menu) 101 VPS (Virtual Presence Speaker) 7 W Wallpaper (Display Set, Setup menu) Web control 92 Wi-Fi 144 APPENDIX 123 ➤ Index En 158 Wired (Network Connection, Setup menu) 119 Wired/Wireless (Network, Information menu) 127 Wireless (Wi-Fi) (Network Connection, Setup menu) 47, 119 Wireless Direct (Network Connection, Setup menu) 52, 119 Wiring (YPAO measurement result) 43 WPS 144 WPS Button (Wireless (Wi-Fi), Setup menu) 49 WPS button configuration 48 Y Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) 38 YPAO (Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) YPAO error message 44 YPAO microphone 38 YPAO Vol. (YPAO Volume, Option menu) 97 YPAO Volume (Option menu) 97 YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume, Option menu) 97 YPAO warning message 45 38 Z Zone Rename (Main Zone Set, Setup menu) 121 Zone Rename (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 122 Zone Scene Rename (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 122 Zone2 Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 121 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 159 © 2014 Yamaha Corporation YG258C0/EN